sim: bfin: fix inverted W1C logic
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
a2b64bed 3@c Copyright 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
729c05fc 4@c 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011
8a308ae8 5@c Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 6@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 7@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
8@include configdoc.texi
9@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 10@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 11@c man end
252b5132
RH
12
13@c @smallbook
14
ff5dcc92
SC
15@macro gcctabopt{body}
16@code{\body\}
17@end macro
18
0285c67d
NC
19@c man begin NAME
20@ifset man
21@c Configure for the generation of man pages
22@set UsesEnvVars
23@set GENERIC
0285c67d 24@set ARM
49fa1e15 25@set H8300
0285c67d 26@set HPPA
0285c67d 27@set I960
0285c67d 28@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 29@set M68K
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
2a60a7a8
AM
32@set POWERPC
33@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
34@set Renesas
35@set SPU
36@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 37@set WIN32
e0001a05 38@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
39@end ifset
40@c man end
41
9160ea82
AM
42@ifnottex
43@dircategory Software development
44@direntry
252b5132 45* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
46@end direntry
47@end ifnottex
252b5132 48
0e9517a9 49@copying
e49e529d
JM
50This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
51@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
52@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
53@end ifset
54version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 55
9fbcbd81 56Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000,
8a308ae8 572001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 58
cf055d54 59Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 60under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
61or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
62with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
63Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 64section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 65@end copying
252b5132
RH
66@iftex
67@finalout
68@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 69@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 70@titlepage
71ba23f6 71@title The GNU linker
252b5132 72@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
73@subtitle @code{ld}
74@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
75@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
76@end ifset
252b5132
RH
77@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
78@author Steve Chamberlain
79@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
80@page
81
82@tex
83{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
84\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
85\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 86\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
87\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
88}
89\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
90@end tex
91
92@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 93@c man begin COPYRIGHT
9fbcbd81
NC
94Copyright @copyright{} 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998,
951999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008, 2009 Free
96Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 97
0285c67d 98Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 99under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
100or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 103section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 104@c man end
252b5132 105
252b5132
RH
106@end titlepage
107@end iftex
4ecceb71 108@contents
252b5132
RH
109@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
84ec0e6d 111@ifnottex
252b5132 112@node Top
71ba23f6 113@top LD
e49e529d
JM
114This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117@end ifset
118version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 119
cf055d54 120This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
121Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 123
252b5132
RH
124@menu
125* Overview:: Overview
126* Invocation:: Invocation
127* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128@ifset GENERIC
129* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130@end ifset
131@ifclear GENERIC
132@ifset H8300
133* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
135@ifset Renesas
136* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
137@end ifset
138@ifset I960
139* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
141@ifset ARM
142* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143@end ifset
144@ifset HPPA
145* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
147@ifset M68HC11
148* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
149@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
150@ifset M68K
151* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
153@ifset POWERPC
154* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155@end ifset
156@ifset POWERPC64
157* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
159@ifset SPU
160* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
161@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
162@ifset TICOFF
163* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
164@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
165@ifset WIN32
166* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
167@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
168@ifset XTENSA
169* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
170@end ifset
252b5132
RH
171@end ifclear
172@ifclear SingleFormat
173* BFD:: BFD
174@end ifclear
175@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
176
177* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
178* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 179* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 180* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 181@end menu
84ec0e6d 182@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
183
184@node Overview
185@chapter Overview
186
187@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
188@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 189
0879a67a 190@ifset man
0285c67d 191@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 192ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
193@c man end
194
195@c man begin SEEALSO
196ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
197the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
198@file{ld}.
199@c man end
200@end ifset
201
202@c man begin DESCRIPTION
203
ff5dcc92 204@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 205their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 206compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 207
ff5dcc92 208@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
209a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
210to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
211
0285c67d
NC
212@ifset man
213@c For the man only
ece2d90e 214This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
215@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
216language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
217@end ifset
218
252b5132 219@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
220This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
221to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
222write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
223@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
224available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
225@end ifclear
226
227Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
228linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
229execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 230@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
231(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
232
0285c67d
NC
233@c man end
234
252b5132
RH
235@node Invocation
236@chapter Invocation
237
0285c67d
NC
238@c man begin DESCRIPTION
239
ff5dcc92 240The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
241and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
242you have many choices to control its behavior.
243
0285c67d
NC
244@c man end
245
252b5132
RH
246@ifset UsesEnvVars
247@menu
248* Options:: Command Line Options
249* Environment:: Environment Variables
250@end menu
251
252@node Options
253@section Command Line Options
254@end ifset
255
256@cindex command line
257@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
258
259@c man begin OPTIONS
260
252b5132
RH
261The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
262practice few of them are used in any particular context.
263@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 264For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
265object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
266link a file @code{hello.o}:
267
268@smallexample
269ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
270@end smallexample
271
ff5dcc92 272This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
273result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
274the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
275directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
276
ff5dcc92 277Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
278point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
279as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
280which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
281files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
282different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
283occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
284option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
285noted in the descriptions below.
286
287@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
288Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
289together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
290options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
291an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
292
293Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
294specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
295and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
296are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
297message @samp{No input files}.
298
36f63dca 299If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
300assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
301augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
302linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
303permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
304or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
305@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
306script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
307extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
308to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
309the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
310
311For options whose names are a single letter,
312option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
313whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
314option that requires them.
315
316For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 317precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 318@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 319this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 320only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
321@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
322name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
323output.
324
325Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
326option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
327immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
328@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
329Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
330accepted.
252b5132 331
36f63dca
NC
332Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
333(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
334prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
335compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
336
337@smallexample
2509a395 338 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
339@end smallexample
340
341This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
342silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
343may also arise when passing options that require values through a
344driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
345a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
346and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
347the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
348
349@smallexample
350 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
351@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
352
353Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
354linker:
355
ff5dcc92 356@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 357@include at-file.texi
dff70155 358
2509a395
SL
359@kindex -a @var{keyword}
360@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
361This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
362argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
363@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
364@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
365to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
366
7ee314fa
AM
367@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
368@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
369Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
370@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
371specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
372will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
373finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
374it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
375This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
376interface.
377
252b5132
RH
378@ifset I960
379@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
380@kindex -A @var{arch}
381@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
382@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
383@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
384In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
385Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
386@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
387the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 388archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
389family}, for details.
390
ff5dcc92 391Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
392other architecture families.
393@end ifset
394
395@ifclear SingleFormat
396@cindex binary input format
397@kindex -b @var{format}
398@kindex --format=@var{format}
399@cindex input format
400@cindex input format
401@item -b @var{input-format}
402@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
403@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
404file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 405@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 406that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 407configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 408to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
409default input format the most usual format on each machine.
410@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
411supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
412formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
413@xref{BFD}.
414
415You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
416binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
417linking object files of different formats), by including
418@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 419particular format.
252b5132
RH
420
421The default format is taken from the environment variable
422@code{GNUTARGET}.
423@ifset UsesEnvVars
424@xref{Environment}.
425@end ifset
426You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
427@code{TARGET};
428@ifclear man
429see @ref{Format Commands}.
430@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
431@end ifclear
432
433@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
434@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
435@cindex compatibility, MRI
436@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
437@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 438For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 439files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
440@ifclear man
441@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
442@end ifclear
443@ifset man
444the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
445@end ifset
446Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 447the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
448scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
449If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
450specified by any @samp{-L} options.
451
452@cindex common allocation
453@kindex -d
454@kindex -dc
455@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 456@item -d
252b5132
RH
457@itemx -dc
458@itemx -dp
459These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
460compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
461even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
462script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
463@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
464
7ee314fa
AM
465@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
466@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
467@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
470@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
471specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
472will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
473option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
474The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
475
252b5132
RH
476@cindex entry point, from command line
477@kindex -e @var{entry}
478@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 479@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
480@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
481Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
482program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
483named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
484and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
485base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
486@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
487and other ways of specifying the entry point.
488
b58f81ae
DJ
489@kindex --exclude-libs
490@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
491Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 492exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
493@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
494automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
495port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
496explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
497option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
498be treated as hidden.
499
e1c37eb5
DK
500@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
501@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
502Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
503should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
504into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
505may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
506used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
507the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
508match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
509command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
510of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
511regardless of this option.
512
252b5132
RH
513@cindex dynamic symbol table
514@kindex -E
515@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 516@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
517@item -E
518@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
519@itemx --no-export-dynamic
520When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
521option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
522all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
523set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
524
525If you do not use either of these options (or use the
526@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
527dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
528referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
529
530If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
531back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
532dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
533linking the program itself.
534
55255dae 535You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 536be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 537See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 538
8b747e1a
DK
539Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
540support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
541the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
542
36f63dca 543@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
544@cindex big-endian objects
545@cindex endianness
546@kindex -EB
547@item -EB
548Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
549
550@cindex little-endian objects
551@kindex -EL
552@item -EL
553Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 554@end ifclear
252b5132 555
2509a395
SL
556@kindex -f @var{name}
557@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
558@item -f @var{name}
559@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
560When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
561to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
562table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
563symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
564
565If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
566run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
567the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
568first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
569@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
570in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
571Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
572implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
573machine specific performance.
574
575This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
576will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
577
2509a395
SL
578@kindex -F @var{name}
579@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 580@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 581@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
582When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
583the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
584of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
585on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
586
587If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
588run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
589dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
590filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
591found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
592used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
593@var{name}.
594
ff5dcc92 595Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 596toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
597object files.
598@ifclear SingleFormat
599The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 600@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 601@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
602environment variable.
603@end ifclear
604The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
605creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 606
3dbf70a2 607@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
608@kindex -fini=@var{name}
609@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
610When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
611executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
612address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
613the function to call.
614
252b5132
RH
615@kindex -g
616@item -g
617Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
618
2509a395
SL
619@kindex -G @var{value}
620@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 621@cindex object size
2509a395 622@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
623@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
624Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
625@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
626MIPS ECOFF which supports putting large and small objects into different
627sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
628
629@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 630@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 631@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 632@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
633@itemx -soname=@var{name}
634When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
635the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
636which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
637linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
638field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
639
640@kindex -i
641@cindex incremental link
642@item -i
643Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
644
3dbf70a2 645@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
646@kindex -init=@var{name}
647@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
648When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
649executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
650of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
651function to call.
652
252b5132 653@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 654@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 655@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 656@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
657@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
658Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
659list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
660If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 661will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 662will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 663
ff5dcc92 664On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
665files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
666and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
667called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
668@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
669indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
670to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
671@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
672
673The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
674specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
675was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
676command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
677archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
678the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
679
ff5dcc92 680See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
681archives multiple times.
682
683You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
684
685@ifset GENERIC
686This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 687if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
688behaviour of the AIX linker.
689@end ifset
690
691@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 692@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 693@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 694@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 695@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
696Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
697for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
698option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
699in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
700on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 701@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
702order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
703how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
704option is specified.
252b5132 705
9c8ebd6a
DJ
706If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
707by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, a path specified when the linker is configured.
708
252b5132
RH
709@ifset UsesEnvVars
710The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 711@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
712some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
713@end ifset
714
715The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
716@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
717at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
718
719@cindex emulation
720@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 721@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
722Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
723emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
724
725If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
726@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
727
728Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
729configured.
730
731@cindex link map
732@kindex -M
733@kindex --print-map
734@item -M
735@itemx --print-map
736Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
737information about the link, including the following:
738
739@itemize @bullet
740@item
3b83e13a 741Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
742@item
743How common symbols are allocated.
744@item
745All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
746which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
747@item
748The values assigned to symbols.
749
750Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
751involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
752have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
753linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
754of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
755the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
756linker script containing:
757
758@smallexample
759 foo = 1
760 foo = foo * 4
761 foo = foo + 8
762@end smallexample
763
764will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
765option is used:
766
767@smallexample
768 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
769 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
770 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
771@end smallexample
772
773See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
774scripts.
252b5132
RH
775@end itemize
776
777@kindex -n
778@cindex read-only text
779@cindex NMAGIC
780@kindex --nmagic
781@item -n
782@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
783Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
784libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
785mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
786
787@kindex -N
788@kindex --omagic
789@cindex read/write from cmd line
790@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 791@item -N
252b5132
RH
792@itemx --omagic
793Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
794not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
795libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
796mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
797is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
798specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
799
800@kindex --no-omagic
801@cindex OMAGIC
802@item --no-omagic
803This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
804sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
805be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
806shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
807
808@kindex -o @var{output}
809@kindex --output=@var{output}
810@cindex naming the output file
811@item -o @var{output}
812@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 813Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
814option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
815script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
816
817@kindex -O @var{level}
818@cindex generating optimized output
819@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 820If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 821the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
822should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
823option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
824the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
825no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
826of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 827
a712da20
NC
828@kindex -q
829@kindex --emit-relocs
830@cindex retain relocations in final executable
831@item -q
832@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 833Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
834Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
835order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
836in larger executables.
837
dbab7a7b
NC
838This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
839
4f471f39
RS
840@kindex --force-dynamic
841@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
842@item --force-dynamic
843Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
844to VxWorks targets.
845
252b5132
RH
846@cindex partial link
847@cindex relocatable output
848@kindex -r
1049f94e 849@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 850@item -r
1049f94e 851@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 852Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 853turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
854linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
855magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
856@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 857@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
858If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
859linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
860constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
861
62bf86b4
HPN
862When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
863partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
864relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
865example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
866with input files in other formats at all.
867
252b5132
RH
868This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
869
870@kindex -R @var{file}
871@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
872@cindex symbol-only input
873@item -R @var{filename}
874@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
875Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
876relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
877to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
878programs. You may use this option more than once.
879
ff5dcc92 880For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 881followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 882the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
883
884@kindex -s
885@kindex --strip-all
886@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 887@item -s
252b5132
RH
888@itemx --strip-all
889Omit all symbol information from the output file.
890
891@kindex -S
892@kindex --strip-debug
893@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 894@item -S
252b5132
RH
895@itemx --strip-debug
896Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
897
898@kindex -t
899@kindex --trace
900@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 901@item -t
252b5132 902@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 903Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
904
905@kindex -T @var{script}
906@kindex --script=@var{script}
907@cindex script files
908@item -T @var{scriptfile}
909@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
910Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 911@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 912@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
913output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
914the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
915specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
916options accumulate.
252b5132 917
14be8564
L
918@kindex -dT @var{script}
919@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
920@cindex script files
921@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
922@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
923Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
924
925This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
926processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
927command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
928@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
929behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
930command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
931the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
932@samp{gcc}).
933
252b5132
RH
934@kindex -u @var{symbol}
935@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
936@cindex undefined symbol
937@item -u @var{symbol}
938@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
939Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
940symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
941modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
942different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
943option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
944
945@kindex -Ur
946@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 947@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
948For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
949@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 950turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
951@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
952It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
953with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
954be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
955@samp{-r} for the others.
956
577a0623
AM
957@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
958@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
959Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
960@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
961missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
962specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
963multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
964input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
965in a linker script.
a854a4a7 966
252b5132
RH
967@kindex -v
968@kindex -V
969@kindex --version
970@cindex version
971@item -v
972@itemx --version
973@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 974Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
975lists the supported emulations.
976
977@kindex -x
978@kindex --discard-all
979@cindex deleting local symbols
980@item -x
981@itemx --discard-all
982Delete all local symbols.
983
984@kindex -X
985@kindex --discard-locals
986@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 987@item -X
252b5132 988@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
989Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
990system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
991or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
992
993@kindex -y @var{symbol}
994@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
995@cindex symbol tracing
996@item -y @var{symbol}
997@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
998Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
999option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1000to prepend an underscore.
1001
1002This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1003don't know where the reference is coming from.
1004
1005@kindex -Y @var{path}
1006@item -Y @var{path}
1007Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1008for Solaris compatibility.
1009
1010@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1011@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1012The recognized keywords are:
1013@table @samp
1014
1015@item combreloc
1016Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1017lookup caching possible.
1018
1019@item defs
560e09e9 1020Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1021shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1022
6aa29e7b
JJ
1023@item execstack
1024Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1025
cd6d6c15
NC
1026@item initfirst
1027This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1028It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1029before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1030the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1031the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1032objects.
1033
1034@item interpose
1035Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1036but the primary executable.
1037
5fa222e4
AM
1038@item lazy
1039When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1040dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1041the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1042Lazy binding is the default.
1043
cd6d6c15
NC
1044@item loadfltr
1045Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1046runtime.
1047
1048@item muldefs
1049Allows multiple definitions.
1050
1051@item nocombreloc
1052Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1053
1054@item nocopyreloc
1055Disables production of copy relocs.
1056
1057@item nodefaultlib
1058Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1059ignore any default library search paths.
1060
1061@item nodelete
1062Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1063
1064@item nodlopen
1065Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1066
1067@item nodump
1068Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1069
6aa29e7b
JJ
1070@item noexecstack
1071Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1072
1073@item norelro
1074Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1075
cd6d6c15
NC
1076@item now
1077When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1078dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1079when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1080deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1081first called.
1082
1083@item origin
1084Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1085
6aa29e7b
JJ
1086@item relro
1087Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1088
24718e3b
L
1089@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1090Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1091
1092@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1093Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1094
cd6d6c15
NC
1095@end table
1096
ece2d90e 1097Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1098
1099@kindex -(
1100@cindex groups of archives
1101@item -( @var{archives} -)
1102@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1103The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1104either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1105
1106The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1107references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1108the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1109archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1110object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1111would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1112they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1113resolved.
1114
1115Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1116it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1117more archives.
1118
69da35b5
NC
1119@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1120@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1121@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1122@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1123Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1124recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1125and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1126the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1127behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1128so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1129restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1130
4a43e768
AM
1131@kindex --as-needed
1132@kindex --no-as-needed
1133@item --as-needed
1134@itemx --no-as-needed
1135This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1136on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1137the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1138on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31
NC
1139needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1140emitted for a library that satisfies an undefined symbol reference
1141from a regular object file or, if the library is not found in the
1142DT_NEEDED lists of other libraries linked up to that point, an
1143undefined symbol reference from another dynamic library.
4a43e768
AM
1144@option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1145
e56f61be
L
1146@kindex --add-needed
1147@kindex --no-add-needed
1148@item --add-needed
1149@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1150These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1151their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1152options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1153and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1154
252b5132
RH
1155@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1156@item -assert @var{keyword}
1157This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1158
1159@kindex -Bdynamic
1160@kindex -dy
1161@kindex -call_shared
1162@item -Bdynamic
1163@itemx -dy
1164@itemx -call_shared
1165Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1166for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1167default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1168for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1169multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1170@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1171
a1ab1d2a
UD
1172@kindex -Bgroup
1173@item -Bgroup
1174Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1175section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1176object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1177@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1178only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1179
252b5132
RH
1180@kindex -Bstatic
1181@kindex -dn
1182@kindex -non_shared
1183@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1184@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1185@itemx -dn
1186@itemx -non_shared
1187@itemx -static
1188Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1189platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1190variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1191may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1192library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1193option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1194option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1195shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1196references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1197libraries.
252b5132
RH
1198
1199@kindex -Bsymbolic
1200@item -Bsymbolic
1201When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1202definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1203for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1204within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1205platforms which support shared libraries.
1206
40b36307
L
1207@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1208@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1209When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1210symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
40b36307
L
1211This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1212libraries.
1213
55255dae
L
1214@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1215@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1216Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1217typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1218global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1219within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1220to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1221in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1222which support shared libraries.
1223
1224The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1225scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1226
40b36307
L
1227@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1228@item --dynamic-list-data
1229Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1230
1231@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1232@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1233Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1234is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1235
0b8a70d9
L
1236@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1237@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1238Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1239
252b5132
RH
1240@kindex --check-sections
1241@kindex --no-check-sections
1242@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1243@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1244Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1245been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1246perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1247suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1248allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1249restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1250Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1251force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1252option.
252b5132 1253
ddbb8a31
NC
1254@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1255@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1256@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1257@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1258This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1259by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1260command line. Normally the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1261output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1262input dynamic library. With @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}
1263specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1264follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries ignored. The default
1265behaviour can be restored with @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1266
1267This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1268libraries. With the default setting dynamic libraries mentioned on
1269the command line will be recursively searched, following their
1270DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1271required by the output binary. With
1272@option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries} specified however the searching
1273of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the dynamic
1274library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1275symbols.
1276
252b5132
RH
1277@cindex cross reference table
1278@kindex --cref
1279@item --cref
1280Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1281generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1282Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1283
1284The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1285easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1286sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1287symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1288definition. The remaining files contain references to the symbol.
1289
4818e05f
AM
1290@cindex common allocation
1291@kindex --no-define-common
1292@item --no-define-common
1293This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1294The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1295@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1296
1297The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1298the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1299of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1300forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1301Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1302from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1303This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1304and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1305duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1306paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1307
252b5132 1308@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1309@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1310@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1311Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1312address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1313times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1314limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1315context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1316symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1317constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1318using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments,,
1319Assignment: Symbol Definitions}). @emph{Note:} there should be no white
1320space between @var{symbol}, the equals sign (``@key{=}''), and
1321@var{expression}.
1322
1323@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1324@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1325@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1326@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1327@itemx --no-demangle
1328These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1329and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1330present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1331underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1332mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1333different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1334to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1335demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1336is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1337
1338@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1339@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1340@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1341@item -I@var{file}
1342@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1343Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1344generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1345linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1346doing.
1347
7ce691ae 1348@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1349@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1350@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1351@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1352Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1353with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1354
252b5132
RH
1355@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1356@item --force-exe-suffix
1357Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1358
1359If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1360@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1361the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1362option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1363Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1364it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1365
1366@kindex --gc-sections
1367@kindex --no-gc-sections
1368@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1369@item --gc-sections
1370@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1371Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1372targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761
NC
1373performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1374@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line.
252b5132 1375
d5465ba2
AM
1376@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1377examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1378symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1379command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1380referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1381libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1382referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1383the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1384relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1385
ac69cbc6 1386This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
fc073cb7 1387@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1388specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1389a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1390
c17d87de
NC
1391@kindex --print-gc-sections
1392@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1393@cindex garbage collection
1394@item --print-gc-sections
1395@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1396List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1397printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1398collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1399default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1400be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1401line.
1402
252b5132
RH
1403@cindex help
1404@cindex usage
1405@kindex --help
1406@item --help
1407Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1408
ea20a7da
CC
1409@kindex --target-help
1410@item --target-help
1411Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1412
2509a395
SL
1413@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1414@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1415Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1416@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1417
1418@cindex memory usage
1419@kindex --no-keep-memory
1420@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1421@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1422symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1423instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1424necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1425while linking a large executable.
1426
1427@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1428@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1429@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1430@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1431Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1432is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1433The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1434behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1435libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1436
aa713662
L
1437@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1438@kindex -z muldefs
1439@item --allow-multiple-definition
1440@itemx -z muldefs
1441Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1442report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1443first definition will be used.
1444
b79e8c78 1445@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1446@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1447@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1448@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1449Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1450This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1451determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1452shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1453how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1454
903249d7
NC
1455The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1456referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1457an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1458a shared library.
1459
1460The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1461libraries specified at link time are that:
1462
1463@itemize @bullet
1464@item
1465A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1466that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1467resolvable at load time.
1468@item
1469There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1470symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1471
1472The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1473select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1474architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1475appropriate memset function.
1476@end itemize
b79e8c78 1477
31941635
L
1478@kindex --no-undefined-version
1479@item --no-undefined-version
1480Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1481it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1482will be issued instead.
1483
3e3b46e5
PB
1484@kindex --default-symver
1485@item --default-symver
1486Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1487exported symbols.
1488
1489@kindex --default-imported-symver
1490@item --default-imported-symver
1491Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1492imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1493
252b5132
RH
1494@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1495@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1496Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1497files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1498been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1499This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1500errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1501have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1502inappropriate.
1503
fe7929ce
AM
1504@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1505@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1506Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1507library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1508
252b5132
RH
1509@kindex --no-whole-archive
1510@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1511Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1512archive files.
1513
1514@cindex output file after errors
1515@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1516@item --noinhibit-exec
1517Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1518Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1519errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1520when it issues any error whatsoever.
1521
0a9c1c8e
CD
1522@kindex -nostdlib
1523@item -nostdlib
1524Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1525command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1526(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1527
252b5132 1528@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1529@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1530@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1531@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1532file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1533@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1534object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1535object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1536should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1537usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1538name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1539list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1540command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1541this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1542@end ifclear
1543
36af4a4e
JJ
1544@kindex -pie
1545@kindex --pic-executable
1546@item -pie
1547@itemx --pic-executable
1548@cindex position independent executables
1549Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1550ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1551libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1552address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1553normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1554defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1555
252b5132
RH
1556@kindex -qmagic
1557@item -qmagic
1558This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1559
1560@kindex -Qy
1561@item -Qy
1562This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1563
1564@kindex --relax
1565@cindex synthesizing linker
1566@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1567@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1568@item --relax
28d5f677 1569@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1570An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1571@ifset GENERIC
1572This option is only supported on a few targets.
1573@end ifset
1574@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1575@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1576@end ifset
1577@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1578@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1579@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1580@ifset XTENSA
1581@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1582@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1583@ifset M68HC11
1584@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1585@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1586@ifset POWERPC
1587@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1588@end ifset
252b5132 1589
28d5f677
NC
1590On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1591global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1592addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1593synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1594instructions, and combinig constant values.
252b5132
RH
1595
1596On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1597debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1598@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1599This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1600family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1601@end ifset
1602
1603@ifset GENERIC
1604On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1605but ignored.
1606@end ifset
1607
28d5f677
NC
1608On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1609@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1610
252b5132
RH
1611@cindex retaining specified symbols
1612@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1613@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1614@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1615@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1616Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1617discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1618symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1619@ifset GENERIC
1620(such as VxWorks)
1621@end ifset
1622where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1623run-time memory.
1624
1625@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1626or symbols needed for relocations.
1627
1628You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1629line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1630
1631@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1632@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1633@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1634@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1635Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1636linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1637arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1638them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1639also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1640objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1641@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1642ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1643@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1644
ff5dcc92 1645The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
252b5132 1646SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search patch out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1647@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1648runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1649options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1650gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1651file systems.
252b5132 1652
ff5dcc92 1653For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1654followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1655the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1656@end ifset
1657
1658@ifset GENERIC
1659@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1660@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1661@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1662When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1663happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1664of the input files.
1665
1666When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1667non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1668shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1669explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1670specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1671@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1672either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1673appearing multiple times.
1674
28c309a2
NC
1675This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1676that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1677is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1678runtime linker would do.
1679
252b5132 1680The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1681libraries:
252b5132
RH
1682@enumerate
1683@item
ff5dcc92 1684Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1685@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1686Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1687between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1688specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1689used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1690at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1691by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1692the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1693@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1694On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1695@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1696environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1697@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1698On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1699directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1700@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1701For a native linker, the search the contents of the environment
1702variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1703@item
ec4eb78a
L
1704For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1705@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1706libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1707@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1708@item
252b5132
RH
1709The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1710@item
1711For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1712exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1713@end enumerate
1714
1715If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1716warning and continue with the link.
1717@end ifset
1718
1719@kindex -shared
1720@kindex -Bshareable
1721@item -shared
1722@itemx -Bshareable
1723@cindex shared libraries
1724Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1725and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1726shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1727undefined symbols in the link.
1728
252b5132 1729@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1730@item --sort-common
1731@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1732@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1733This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1734ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1735sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1736eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1737between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1738specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1739
2509a395
SL
1740@kindex --sort-section=name
1741@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1742This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1743patterns in the linker script.
1744
2509a395
SL
1745@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1746@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1747This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1748patterns in the linker script.
1749
252b5132 1750@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1751@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1752Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1753each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1754size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1755
1756@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1757@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1758Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1759output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1760This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1761certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1762cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1763that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1764support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1765input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1766more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1767many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1768
1769@kindex --stats
1770@item --stats
1771Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1772as execution time and memory usage.
1773
2509a395 1774@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1775@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1776Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1777configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1778that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1779
252b5132
RH
1780@kindex --traditional-format
1781@cindex traditional format
1782@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1783For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1784the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1785use the traditional format instead.
1786
1787@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1788For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1789symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1790full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1791@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1792trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1793combine duplicate entries.
1794
2509a395
SL
1795@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1796@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1797Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1798address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1799times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1800line.
1801@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1802for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1803@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1804should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1805sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1806
2509a395
SL
1807@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1808@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1809@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1810@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1811@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1812@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1813@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1814Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1815@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1816
2509a395
SL
1817@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1818@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5
L
1819@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
1820When creating an ELF executable or shared object, it will set the address
1821of the first byte of the text segment.
1822
560e09e9
NC
1823@kindex --unresolved-symbols
1824@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
1825Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
1826values for @samp{method}:
1827
1828@table @samp
1829@item ignore-all
da8bce14 1830Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
1831
1832@item report-all
da8bce14 1833Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
1834
1835@item ignore-in-object-files
1836Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
1837ignore them if they come from regular object files.
1838
1839@item ignore-in-shared-libs
1840Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
1841ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
1842when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
1843libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
1844command line.
1845@end table
1846
1847The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
1848by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
1849
1850Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
1851unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
1852can change this to a warning.
1853
1715a13c
L
1854@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
1855@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 1856@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 1857@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 1858Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 1859supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
1860the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
1861argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
1862
1863@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
1864@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 1865@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
1866Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
1867used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 1868about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
1869is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
1870see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
1871use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
1872symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
1873@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 1874
7ce691ae 1875@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
1876@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
1877@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
1878@item --warn-common
1879Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
560e09e9 1880a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practise,
252b5132
RH
1881but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
1882you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
560e09e9 1883Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practise, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
1884warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
1885
1886There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
1887
1888@table @samp
1889@item int i = 1;
1890A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
1891file.
1892
1893@item extern int i;
1894An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
1895There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
1896variable somewhere.
1897
1898@item int i;
1899A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
1900variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
1901The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
1902single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
1903size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
1904a definition of the same variable.
1905@end table
1906
1907The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
1908Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
1909just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
1910encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
1911a common symbol.
1912
1913@enumerate
1914@item
1915Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
1916definition for the symbol.
1917@smallexample
1918@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1919 overridden by definition
1920@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
1921@end smallexample
1922
1923@item
1924Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
1925the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
1926except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
1927@smallexample
1928@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
1929 overriding common
1930@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
1931@end smallexample
1932
1933@item
1934Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
1935@smallexample
1936@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
1937 of `@var{symbol}'
1938@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
1939@end smallexample
1940
1941@item
1942Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
1943@smallexample
1944@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1945 overridden by larger common
1946@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
1947@end smallexample
1948
1949@item
1950Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
1951the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
1952encountered in a different order.
1953@smallexample
1954@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
1955 overriding smaller common
1956@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
1957@end smallexample
1958@end enumerate
1959
1960@kindex --warn-constructors
1961@item --warn-constructors
1962Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
1963object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
1964detect the use of global constructors.
1965
1966@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
1967@item --warn-multiple-gp
1968Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
1969This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
1970Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
1971section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
1972of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
1973base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
1974base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
1975bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
1976large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
1977values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
1978option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
1979
1980@kindex --warn-once
1981@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
1982@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
1983@item --warn-once
1984Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
1985which refers to it.
1986
1987@kindex --warn-section-align
1988@cindex warnings, on section alignment
1989@cindex section alignment, warnings on
1990@item --warn-section-align
1991Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
1992alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
1993The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
1994is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
1995the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
1996
8fdd7217
NC
1997@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
1998@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 1999Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2000
a0c402a5
L
2001@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2002@item --warn-alternate-em
2003Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2004
560e09e9
NC
2005@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2006@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2007If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2008@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2009This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2010
2011@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2012@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2013This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2014it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2015
252b5132
RH
2016@kindex --whole-archive
2017@cindex including an entire archive
2018@item --whole-archive
2019For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2020@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2021in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2022files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2023library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2024library. This option may be used more than once.
2025
7ec229ce 2026Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2027about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2028Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2029list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2030your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2031
2509a395
SL
2032@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2033@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2034Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2035@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2036undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2037@var{symbol}.
2038
2039This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2040wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2041wishes to call the system function, it should call
2042@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2043
2044Here is a trivial example:
2045
2046@smallexample
2047void *
cc2f008e 2048__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2049@{
cc2f008e 2050 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2051 return __real_malloc (c);
2052@}
2053@end smallexample
2054
ff5dcc92 2055If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2056all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2057instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2058call the real @code{malloc} function.
2059
2060You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2061links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2062you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2063file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2064call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2065
6aa29e7b
JJ
2066@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2067@item --eh-frame-hdr
2068Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2069@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2070
6c1439be
L
2071@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2072@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2073@item --enable-new-dtags
2074@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2075This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2076systems may not understand them. If you specify
ff5dcc92
SC
2077@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the dynamic tags will be created as needed.
2078If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2079created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2080those options are only available for ELF systems.
2081
2d643429 2082@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2083@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2084Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2085close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2086time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2087increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2088value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2089
fdc90cb4
JJ
2090@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2091@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2092Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2093@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2094new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2095the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2096hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2097
35835446
JR
2098@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2099@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2100This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2101linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2102for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2103about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2104
4f9c04f7 2105Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 21061021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2107run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2108has been used.
2109
2110The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2111enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2112
c0065db7
RM
2113@kindex --build-id
2114@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2115@item --build-id
2116@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2117Request creation of @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section.
2118The contents of the note are unique bits identifying this linked
2119file. @var{style} can be @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits,
24382dca
RM
2120@code{sha1} to use a 160-bit @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative
2121parts of the output contents, @code{md5} to use a 128-bit
2122@sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of the output contents, or
2123@code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit string specified as
2124an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and @code{:}
2125characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style} is
2126omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2127
2128The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2129that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2130unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2131to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2132file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2133string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2134
2135Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2136@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2137@end table
2138
0285c67d
NC
2139@c man end
2140
36f63dca 2141@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2142
0285c67d
NC
2143@c man begin OPTIONS
2144
ff5dcc92 2145The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2146the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2147normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2148use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2149@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2150like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2151symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2152object file).
2153
2154In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2155support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2156PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2157values by either a space or an equals sign.
2158
ff5dcc92 2159@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2160
2161@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2162@item --add-stdcall-alias
2163If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2164as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2165[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2166
2167@kindex --base-file
2168@item --base-file @var{file}
2169Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2170addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2171@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2172[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2173
2174@kindex --dll
2175@item --dll
2176Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2177@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2178file.
bb10df36 2179[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2180
88183869
DK
2181@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2182@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2183@item --enable-long-section-names
2184@itemx --disable-long-section-names
2185The PE variants of the Coff object format add an extension that permits
2186the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2187for Coff. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2188fully-linked executable images do not carry the Coff string table required
2189to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2190allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2191disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2192generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2193as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
3efd345c
DK
2194with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2195GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2196information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2197option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2198section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2199when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2200image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2201[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2202
252b5132
RH
2203@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2204@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2205@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2206@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2207If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2208do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2209only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2210resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2211undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2212@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2213to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2214warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2215import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2216to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2217feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2218@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2219mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2220[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2221
522f09cd
KT
2222@kindex --leading-underscore
2223@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2224@item --leading-underscore
2225@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2226For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2227in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2228disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2229
252b5132
RH
2230@cindex DLLs, creating
2231@kindex --export-all-symbols
2232@item --export-all-symbols
2233If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2234be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2235otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2236explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2237attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2238option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2239@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2240@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2241exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2242re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2243such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2244@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2245@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2246Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2247not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2248extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2249(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2250These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2251@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2252@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2253@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2254@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2255[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2256
2257@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2258@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2259Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2260exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2261[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2262
2927aaca
NC
2263@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2264@item --exclude-all-symbols
2265Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2266[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2267
252b5132
RH
2268@kindex --file-alignment
2269@item --file-alignment
2270Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2271file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2272512.
bb10df36 2273[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2274
2275@cindex heap size
2276@kindex --heap
2277@item --heap @var{reserve}
2278@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2279Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2280to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2281committed.
bb10df36 2282[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2283
2284@cindex image base
2285@kindex --image-base
2286@item --image-base @var{value}
2287Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2288the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2289is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2290your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2291other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2292for dlls.
bb10df36 2293[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2294
2295@kindex --kill-at
2296@item --kill-at
2297If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2298symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2299[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2300
26d2d8a2
BF
2301@kindex --large-address-aware
2302@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2303If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2304header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2305greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2306or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2307section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2308[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2309
252b5132
RH
2310@kindex --major-image-version
2311@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2312Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2313[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2314
2315@kindex --major-os-version
2316@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2317Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2318[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2319
2320@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2321@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2322Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2323[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2324
2325@kindex --minor-image-version
2326@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2327Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2328[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2329
2330@kindex --minor-os-version
2331@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2332Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2333[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2334
2335@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2336@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2337Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2338[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2339
2340@cindex DEF files, creating
2341@cindex DLLs, creating
2342@kindex --output-def
2343@item --output-def @var{file}
2344The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2345file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2346(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2347library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2348automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2349[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2350
b044cda1
CW
2351@cindex DLLs, creating
2352@kindex --out-implib
2353@item --out-implib @var{file}
2354The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2355import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2356import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2357may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2358makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2359creation step.
bb10df36 2360[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2361
2362@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2363@item --enable-auto-image-base
2364Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, unless one is specified
2365using the @code{--image-base} argument. By using a hash generated
2366from the dllname to create unique image bases for each DLL, in-memory
2367collisions and relocations which can delay program execution are
2368avoided.
bb10df36 2369[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2370
2371@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2372@item --disable-auto-image-base
2373Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2374user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2375default.
bb10df36 2376[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2377
2378@cindex DLLs, linking to
2379@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2380@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2381When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2382search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2383@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2384between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2385uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2386@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2387[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2388
2389@kindex --enable-auto-import
2390@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2391Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2392DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2393building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2394'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2395to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2396specification published by Microsoft.
2397
e2a83dd0
NC
2398Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2399data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2400placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2401around a problem with consts that is described here:
2402http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2403
4d8907ac
DS
2404Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2405see this message:
0d888aac 2406
ece2d90e 2407"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2408documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2409
ece2d90e
NC
2410This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2411ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2412allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2413fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2414constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2415multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2416this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2417of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2418the warning, and exit.
2419
2420There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2421data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2422
2fa9fc65
NC
2423One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2424of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2425this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2426
c0065db7
RM
2427A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2428that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2429there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2430a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2431
2432@example
2433extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2434extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2435 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2436@end example
2437
2438or
2439
2440@example
2441extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2442extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2443 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2444@end example
2445
c0065db7 2446For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2447is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2448
2449@example
2450extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2451extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2452 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2453@end example
2454
c406afaf
NC
2455or
2456
2457@example
2458extern long long extern_ll;
2459extern_ll -->
2460 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2461@end example
2462
2fa9fc65 2463A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2464'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
560e09e9 2465@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practise that
0d888aac 2466requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2467building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2468merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2469between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2470constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2471
2472Original:
2473@example
2474--foo.h
2475extern int arr[];
2476--foo.c
2477#include "foo.h"
2478void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2479 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2480@}
2481@end example
2482
2483Solution 1:
2484@example
2485--foo.h
2486extern int arr[];
2487--foo.c
2488#include "foo.h"
2489void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2490 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2491 volatile int *parr = arr;
2492 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2493@}
2494@end example
2495
2496Solution 2:
2497@example
2498--foo.h
2499/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2500#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2501 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2502#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2503#else
2504#define FOO_IMPORT
2505#endif
2506extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2507--foo.c
2508#include "foo.h"
2509void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2510 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2511@}
2512@end example
2513
c0065db7 2514A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2515library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2516for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2517functions).
bb10df36 2518[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2519
2520@kindex --disable-auto-import
2521@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2522Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2523@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2524[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2525
2fa9fc65
NC
2526@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2527@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2528If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2529that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2530a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2531environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2532[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2533
2534@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2535@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2536Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2537DLLs. This is the default.
bb10df36 2538[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2539
b044cda1
CW
2540@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2541@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2542Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2543[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2544
252b5132
RH
2545@kindex --section-alignment
2546@item --section-alignment
2547Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2548addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2549[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2550
2551@cindex stack size
2552@kindex --stack
2553@item --stack @var{reserve}
2554@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5
DS
2555Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2556to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2Mb reserved, 4K
252b5132 2557committed.
bb10df36 2558[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2559
2560@kindex --subsystem
2561@item --subsystem @var{which}
2562@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2563@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2564Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2565legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2566@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2567the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2568@var{which}.
bb10df36 2569[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2570
2f563b51
DK
2571The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2572of the PE file header:
2573[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2574
2575@kindex --dynamicbase
2576@item --dynamicbase
2577The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2578randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2579Vista for i386 PE targets.
2580
2581@kindex --forceinteg
2582@item --forceinteg
2583Code integrity checks are enforced.
2584
2585@kindex --nxcompat
2586@item --nxcompat
2587The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2588This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2589
2590@kindex --no-isolation
2591@item --no-isolation
2592Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2593
2594@kindex --no-seh
2595@item --no-seh
2596The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2597this image.
2598
2599@kindex --no-bind
2600@item --no-bind
2601Do not bind this image.
2602
2603@kindex --wdmdriver
2604@item --wdmdriver
2605The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2606
2607@kindex --tsaware
2608@item --tsaware
2609The image is Terminal Server aware.
2610
252b5132
RH
2611@end table
2612
0285c67d
NC
2613@c man end
2614
93fd0973
SC
2615@ifset M68HC11
2616@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2617
2618@c man begin OPTIONS
2619
2620The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2621memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2622
2623@table @gcctabopt
2624
2625@kindex --no-trampoline
2626@item --no-trampoline
2627This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2628is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2629instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2630
2631@kindex --bank-window
2632@item --bank-window @var{name}
2633This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2634the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2635The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2636paging and addresses within the memory window.
2637
2638@end table
2639
2640@c man end
2641@end ifset
2642
7fb9f789
NC
2643@ifset M68K
2644@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2645
2646@c man begin OPTIONS
2647
2648The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2649when linking for 68K targets.
2650
2651@table @gcctabopt
2652
2653@kindex --got
2654@item --got=@var{type}
2655This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2656@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2657@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2658Info entry for @file{ld}.
2659
2660@end table
2661
2662@c man end
2663@end ifset
2664
252b5132
RH
2665@ifset UsesEnvVars
2666@node Environment
2667@section Environment Variables
2668
0285c67d
NC
2669@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2670
560e09e9 2671You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2672@ifclear SingleFormat
2673@code{GNUTARGET},
2674@end ifclear
2675@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2676
36f63dca 2677@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2678@kindex GNUTARGET
2679@cindex default input format
2680@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2681use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2682of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2683@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2684of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2685attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2686this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2687there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2688object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2689BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2690in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2691@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2692
2693@kindex LDEMULATION
2694@cindex default emulation
2695@cindex emulation, default
2696@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2697@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2698behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2699available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2700the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2701variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2702linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2703
2704@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2705@cindex demangling, default
2706Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
2707@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
2708default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
2709a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
2710may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
2711options.
2712
0285c67d
NC
2713@c man end
2714@end ifset
2715
252b5132
RH
2716@node Scripts
2717@chapter Linker Scripts
2718
2719@cindex scripts
2720@cindex linker scripts
2721@cindex command files
2722Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
2723written in the linker command language.
2724
2725The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
2726the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
2727the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
2728more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
2729direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
2730described below.
2731
2732The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
2733yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
2734linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
2735to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
2736such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
2737
2738You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
2739line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
2740default linker script.
2741
2742You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
2743to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
2744Linker Scripts}.
2745
2746@menu
2747* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
2748* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
2749* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
2750* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
2751* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
2752* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
2753* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
2754* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
2755* VERSION:: VERSION Command
2756* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
2757* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
2758@end menu
2759
2760@node Basic Script Concepts
2761@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
2762@cindex linker script concepts
2763We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
2764describe the linker script language.
2765
2766The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
2767file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
2768@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
2769The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
2770purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
2771among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
2772section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
2773in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
2774
2775Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
2776also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
2777contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which mean that
2778the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
2779A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
2780area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
2781loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
2782which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
2783of debugging information.
2784
2785Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
2786first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
2787the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
2788@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
2789section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
2790same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
2791is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
2792(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
2793based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
2794RAM address would be the VMA.
2795
2796You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
2797program with the @samp{-h} option.
2798
2799Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
2800@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
2801has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
2802information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
2803will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
2804static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
2805referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
2806
2807You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
2808program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
2809option.
2810
2811@node Script Format
2812@section Linker Script Format
2813@cindex linker script format
2814Linker scripts are text files.
2815
2816You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
2817either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
2818symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
2819generally ignored.
2820
2821Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
2822If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
2823otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
2824double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
2825file name.
2826
2827You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
2828@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
2829to whitespace.
2830
2831@node Simple Example
2832@section Simple Linker Script Example
2833@cindex linker script example
2834@cindex example of linker script
2835Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
2836
2837The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
2838@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
2839memory layout of the output file.
2840
2841The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
2842describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
2843code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
2844@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
2845Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
2846your input files.
2847
2848For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
28490x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
2850linker script which will do that:
2851@smallexample
2852SECTIONS
2853@{
2854 . = 0x10000;
2855 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
2856 . = 0x8000000;
2857 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
2858 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
2859@}
2860@end smallexample
2861
2862You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
2863followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
2864descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
2865
252b5132
RH
2866The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
2867sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
2868counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
2869other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
2870current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
2871incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
2872@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
2873
2874The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
2875required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
2876after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
2877which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
2878wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
2879means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
2880
2881Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
2882@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
2883@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
2884
2885The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
2886the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
2887at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
2888output section, the value of the location counter will be
2889@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
2890effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 2891immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
2892
2893The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
2894alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
2895example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
2896sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
2897may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
2898sections.
2899
2900That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
2901
2902@node Simple Commands
2903@section Simple Linker Script Commands
2904@cindex linker script simple commands
2905In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
2906
2907@menu
2908* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
2909* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
2910@ifclear SingleFormat
2911* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
2912@end ifclear
2913
4a93e180 2914* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
2915* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
2916@end menu
2917
2918@node Entry Point
36f63dca 2919@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
2920@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2921@cindex start of execution
2922@cindex first instruction
2923@cindex entry point
2924The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
2925point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
2926entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
2927@smallexample
2928ENTRY(@var{symbol})
2929@end smallexample
2930
2931There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
2932entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
2933stopping when one of them succeeds:
2934@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 2935@item
252b5132 2936the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 2937@item
252b5132 2938the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 2939@item
3ab904c4
NC
2940the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
2941targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
2942check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 2943@item
252b5132 2944the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 2945@item
252b5132
RH
2946The address @code{0}.
2947@end itemize
2948
2949@node File Commands
36f63dca 2950@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
2951@cindex linker script file commands
2952Several linker script commands deal with files.
2953
2954@table @code
2955@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
2956@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
2957@cindex including a linker script
2958Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
2959be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 2960with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
296110 levels deep.
2962
4006703d
NS
2963You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
2964@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
2965
252b5132
RH
2966@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2967@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
2968@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
2969@cindex input files in linker scripts
2970@cindex input object files in linker scripts
2971@cindex linker script input object files
2972The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
2973in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
2974
2975For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
2976a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
2977then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
2978
2979In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
2980script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
2981
e3f2db7f
AO
2982In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
2983with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
2984located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
2985for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
2986open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
2987linker will search through the archive library search path. See the
2988description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 2989
ff5dcc92 2990If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
2991name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
2992@samp{-l}.
2993
2994When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
2995files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
2996script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
2997
2998@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
2999@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3000@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3001@cindex grouping input files
3002The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3003files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3004new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3005in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3006
b717d30e
JJ
3007@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3008@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3009@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3010This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3011commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3012as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3013with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3014when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3015@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3016and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3017setting afterwards.
3018
252b5132
RH
3019@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3020@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3021@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3022The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3023@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3024@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3025Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3026precedence.
3027
3028You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3029output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3030
3031@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3032@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3033@cindex library search path in linker script
3034@cindex archive search path in linker script
3035@cindex search path in linker script
3036The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3037@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3038@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3039on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3040are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3041the command line option are searched first.
3042
3043@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3044@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3045@cindex first input file
3046The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3047that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3048though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3049when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3050first file.
3051@end table
3052
3053@ifclear SingleFormat
3054@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3055@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3056A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3057
3058@table @code
3059@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3060@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3061@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3062@cindex output file format in linker script
3063The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3064output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3065exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3066(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3067line option takes precedence.
3068
3069You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3070formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3071This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3072desired endianness.
3073
3074If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3075will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3076output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3077used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3078
3079For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3080command:
3081@smallexample
3082OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3083@end smallexample
3084This says that the default format for the output file is
3085@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3086option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3087format.
3088
3089@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3090@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3091@cindex input file format in linker script
3092The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3093files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3094This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3095(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3096is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3097command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3098@end table
3099@end ifclear
3100
4a93e180
NC
3101@node REGION_ALIAS
3102@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3103@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3104@cindex region alias
3105@cindex region names
3106
3107Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3108@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3109
3110@smallexample
3111REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3112@end smallexample
3113
3114The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3115memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3116to memory regions. An example follows.
3117
3118Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3119memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3120that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3121non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3122access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3123read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3124sections:
3125
3126@itemize @bullet
3127@item
3128@code{.text} program code;
3129@item
3130@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3131@item
3132@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3133@item
3134@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3135@end itemize
3136
3137The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3138part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3139output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3140systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3141@code{C}:
3142@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3143@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3144@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3145@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3146@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3147@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3148@end multitable
3149The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3150loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3151the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3152the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3153
3154The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3155includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3156memory layout:
3157@smallexample
3158INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3159
3160SECTIONS
3161 @{
3162 .text :
3163 @{
3164 *(.text)
3165 @} > REGION_TEXT
3166 .rodata :
3167 @{
3168 *(.rodata)
3169 rodata_end = .;
3170 @} > REGION_RODATA
3171 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3172 @{
3173 data_start = .;
3174 *(.data)
3175 @} > REGION_DATA
3176 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3177 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3178 .bss :
3179 @{
3180 *(.bss)
3181 @} > REGION_BSS
3182 @}
3183@end smallexample
3184
3185Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3186regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3187variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3188@table @code
3189@item A
3190Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3191@smallexample
3192MEMORY
3193 @{
3194 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3195 @}
3196
3197REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3198REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3199REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3200REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3201@end smallexample
3202@item B
3203Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3204into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3205@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3206@smallexample
3207MEMORY
3208 @{
3209 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3210 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3211 @}
3212
3213REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3214REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3215REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3216REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3217@end smallexample
3218@item C
3219Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3220@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3221initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3222system start into the @code{RAM}.
3223@smallexample
3224MEMORY
3225 @{
3226 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3227 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3228 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3229 @}
3230
3231REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3232REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3233REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3234REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3235@end smallexample
3236@end table
3237
3238It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3239@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3240necessary:
3241@smallexample
3242#include <string.h>
3243
3244extern char data_start [];
3245extern char data_size [];
3246extern char data_load_start [];
3247
3248void copy_data(void)
3249@{
3250 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3251 @{
3252 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3253 @}
3254@}
3255@end smallexample
3256
252b5132 3257@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3258@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3259There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3260
3261@table @code
3262@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3263@kindex ASSERT
3264@cindex assertion in linker script
3265Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3266with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3267
3268@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3269@kindex EXTERN
3270@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3271Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3272symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3273modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3274each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3275command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3276
3277@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3278@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3279@cindex common allocation in linker script
3280This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3281to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3282output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3283
4818e05f
AM
3284@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3285@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3286@cindex common allocation in linker script
3287This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3288command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3289to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3290
53d25da6
AM
3291@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3292@kindex INSERT
3293@cindex insert user script into default script
3294This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3295augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3296inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3297@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3298default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3299sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3300linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3301insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3302linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3303default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3304of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3305to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3306is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3307
3308@smallexample
3309SECTIONS
3310@{
3311 OVERLAY :
3312 @{
3313 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3314 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3315 @}
3316@}
3317INSERT AFTER .text;
3318@end smallexample
3319
252b5132
RH
3320@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3321@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3322@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3323This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3324references among certain output sections.
3325
3326In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3327using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3328will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3329errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3330a function defined in the other section.
3331
3332The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3333@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3334an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3335@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3336names.
3337
3338@ifclear SingleFormat
3339@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3340@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3341@cindex machine architecture
3342@cindex architecture
3343Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3344of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3345architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3346the @samp{-f} option.
3347@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3348
3349@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3350@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3351This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3352@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3353in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3354@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3355@end table
3356
3357@node Assignments
3358@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3359@cindex assignment in scripts
3360@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3361@cindex variables, defining
3362You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3363the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3364
3365@menu
3366* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3367* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3368* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3369* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3370@end menu
3371
3372@node Simple Assignments
3373@subsection Simple Assignments
3374
3375You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3376
3377@table @code
3378@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3379@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3380@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3381@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3382@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3383@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3384@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3385@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3386@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3387@end table
3388
3389The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3390@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3391defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3392
3393The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3394may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3395
3396The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3397
3398Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3399
3400You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3401statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3402section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3403
3404The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3405expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3406
3407Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3408assignments may be used:
3409
3410@smallexample
3411floating_point = 0;
3412SECTIONS
3413@{
3414 .text :
3415 @{
3416 *(.text)
3417 _etext = .;
3418 @}
156e34dd 3419 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3420 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3421@}
3422@end smallexample
3423@noindent
3424In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3425zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3426the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3427defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3428upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3429
3430@node PROVIDE
3431@subsection PROVIDE
3432@cindex PROVIDE
3433In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3434only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3435the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3436@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3437@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3438@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3439@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3440@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3441
3442Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3443@smallexample
3444SECTIONS
3445@{
3446 .text :
3447 @{
3448 *(.text)
3449 _etext = .;
3450 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3451 @}
3452@}
3453@end smallexample
3454
3455In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3456underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3457the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3458underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3459If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3460linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3461
7af8e998
L
3462@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3463@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3464@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3465Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3466hidden and won't be exported.
3467
73ae6183
NC
3468@node Source Code Reference
3469@subsection Source Code Reference
3470
3471Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3472intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3473a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3474symbol that does not have a value.
3475
3476Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3477transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3478stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3479prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3480mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3481of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3482variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3483linker script variable might be referred to as:
3484
3485@smallexample
3486 extern int foo;
3487@end smallexample
3488
3489But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3490
3491@smallexample
3492 _foo = 1000;
3493@end smallexample
3494
3495In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3496transformation has taken place.
3497
3498When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3499things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3500in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3501second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3502table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3503contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3504value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3505
3506@smallexample
3507 int foo = 1000;
3508@end smallexample
3509
3510creates a entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
3511holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3512number 1000 is initially stored.
3513
3514When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3515first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3516memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3517So:
3518
3519@smallexample
3520 foo = 1;
3521@end smallexample
3522
3523looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3524associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3525address. Whereas:
3526
3527@smallexample
3528 int * a = & foo;
3529@end smallexample
3530
3531looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets it address
3532and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3533the variable @samp{a}.
3534
3535Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3536the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3537an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3538
3539@smallexample
3540 foo = 1000;
3541@end smallexample
3542
3543creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3544the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3545address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3546linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3547access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3548
3549Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3550you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3551use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3552section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3553linker script contains these declarations:
3554
3555@smallexample
3556@group
3557 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
3558 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM) - 1;
3559 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3560@end group
3561@end smallexample
3562
3563Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3564
3565@smallexample
3566@group
3567 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3568
73ae6183
NC
3569 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3570@end group
3571@end smallexample
3572
3573Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
3574
252b5132 3575@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3576@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3577@kindex SECTIONS
3578The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3579into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3580
3581The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3582@smallexample
3583SECTIONS
3584@{
3585 @var{sections-command}
3586 @var{sections-command}
3587 @dots{}
3588@}
3589@end smallexample
3590
3591Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3592
3593@itemize @bullet
3594@item
3595an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3596@item
3597a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3598@item
3599an output section description
3600@item
3601an overlay description
3602@end itemize
3603
3604The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3605@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3606those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3607understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3608the layout of the output file.
3609
3610Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3611below.
3612
3613If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3614linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3615section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3616input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3617example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3618in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3619
3620@menu
3621* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3622* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3623* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3624* Input Section:: Input section description
3625* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3626* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3627* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3628* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3629* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3630@end menu
3631
3632@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3633@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3634The full description of an output section looks like this:
3635@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 3636@group
7e7d5768 3637@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
3638 [AT(@var{lma})]
3639 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
3640 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
3641 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
3642 @{
3643 @var{output-section-command}
3644 @var{output-section-command}
3645 @dots{}
562d3460 3646 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
3647@end group
3648@end smallexample
3649
3650Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
3651
3652The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
3653name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
3654The line breaks and other white space are optional.
3655
3656Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
3657
3658@itemize @bullet
3659@item
3660a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3661@item
3662an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
3663@item
3664data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
3665@item
3666a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
3667@end itemize
3668
3669@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 3670@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
3671@cindex name, section
3672@cindex section name
3673The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
3674meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
3675support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
3676must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
3677example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
3678output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
3679names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
3680quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
3681characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
3682commas must be quoted.
3683
3684The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
3685Discarding}.
3686
3687@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 3688@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
3689@cindex address, section
3690@cindex section address
3691The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
3692address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
3693is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
3694
3695If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
3696section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
3697to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
3698alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
3699contained within the output section.
3700
3701The output section address heuristic is as follows:
3702
3703@itemize @bullet
3704@item
3705If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
3706is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
3707in that region.
3708
3709@item
3710If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
3711regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
3712section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
3713be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
3714
3715@item
3716If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
3717the output address will be based on the current value of the location
3718counter.
3719@end itemize
3720
3721@noindent
3722For example:
3723
252b5132
RH
3724@smallexample
3725.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
3726@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3727
252b5132
RH
3728@noindent
3729and
ea5cae92 3730
252b5132
RH
3731@smallexample
3732.text : @{ *(.text) @}
3733@end smallexample
ea5cae92 3734
252b5132
RH
3735@noindent
3736are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
3737@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
3738counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
3739counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
3740input sections.
252b5132
RH
3741
3742The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
3743For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
3744so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
3745do something like this:
3746@smallexample
3747.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
3748@end smallexample
3749@noindent
3750This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
3751aligned upward to the specified value.
3752
3753Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
3754location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
3755sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
3756
3757@node Input Section
36f63dca 3758@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
3759@cindex input sections
3760@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
3761The most common output section command is an input section description.
3762
3763The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
3764You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
3765in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
3766map the input files into your memory layout.
3767
3768@menu
3769* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
3770* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
3771* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
3772* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
3773* Input Section Example:: Input section example
3774@end menu
3775
3776@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 3777@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
3778@cindex input section basics
3779An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
3780by a list of section names in parentheses.
3781
3782The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
3783describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
3784
3785The most common input section description is to include all input
3786sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
3787include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
3788@smallexample
3789*(.text)
3790@end smallexample
3791@noindent
18625d54
CM
3792Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
3793of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
3794match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
3795example:
252b5132 3796@smallexample
b4346c09 3797*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 3798@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
3799will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
3800@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
3801
3802There are two ways to include more than one section:
3803@smallexample
3804*(.text .rdata)
3805*(.text) *(.rdata)
3806@end smallexample
3807@noindent
3808The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
3809@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
3810first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
3811they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
3812@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
3813@samp{.rdata} input sections.
3814
3815You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
3816You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
3817needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
3818@smallexample
3819data.o(.data)
3820@end smallexample
3821
967928e9
AM
3822You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
3823matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
3824with no whitespace around the colon.
3825
3826@table @samp
3827@item archive:file
3828matches file within archive
3829@item archive:
3830matches the whole archive
3831@item :file
3832matches file but not one in an archive
3833@end table
3834
3835Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
3836wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
3837single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
3838@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
3839within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
3840also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
3841other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
3842from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
3843command.
3844
252b5132
RH
3845If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
3846the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
3847commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
3848@smallexample
3849data.o
3850@end smallexample
3851
967928e9
AM
3852When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
3853and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
3854characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
3855name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
3856did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
3857though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
3858@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
3859the archive search path.
3860
3861@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 3862@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
3863@cindex input section wildcards
3864@cindex wildcard file name patterns
3865@cindex file name wildcard patterns
3866@cindex section name wildcard patterns
3867In an input section description, either the file name or the section
3868name or both may be wildcard patterns.
3869
3870The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
3871pattern for the file name.
3872
3873The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
3874
3875@table @samp
3876@item *
3877matches any number of characters
3878@item ?
3879matches any single character
3880@item [@var{chars}]
3881matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
3882character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
3883@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
3884@item \
3885quotes the following character
3886@end table
3887
3888When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
3889will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
3890Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
3891exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
3892@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
3893a @samp{/} character.
3894
3895File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
3896specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
3897does not search directories to expand wildcards.
3898
3899If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
3900appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
3901will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
3902sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
3903@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
3904@smallexample
3905.data : @{ *(.data) @}
3906.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
3907@end smallexample
3908
bcaa7b3e 3909@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
3910Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
3911in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
3912this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
3913pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
3914@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
3915into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
3916
bcaa7b3e
L
3917@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
3918@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3919difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
3920ascending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
3921
02ecc8e9
L
3922@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
3923@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
3924difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
3925ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
3926encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
3927
bcaa7b3e
L
3928@cindex SORT
3929@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
3930
3931When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
3932can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
3933
3934@enumerate
3935@item
3936@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3937It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if 2
3938sections have the same name.
3939@item
3940@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3941It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if 2
3942sections have the same alignment.
3943@item
c0065db7 3944@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
3945treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
3946@item
3947@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
3948is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
3949@item
3950All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
3951@end enumerate
3952
3953When both command line section sorting option and linker script
3954section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
3955takes precedence over the command line option.
3956
3957If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
3958command line option will make the section sorting command to be
3959treated as nested sorting command.
3960
3961@enumerate
3962@item
3963@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
3964@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
3965@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
3966@item
3967@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
3968@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
3969@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
3970@end enumerate
3971
3972If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
3973command line option will be ignored.
3974
252b5132
RH
3975If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
3976@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
3977precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
3978
3979This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
3980files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
3981sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
3982The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
3983with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
3984linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
3985@smallexample
3986@group
3987SECTIONS @{
3988 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3989 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
3990 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3991 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3992@}
3993@end group
3994@end smallexample
3995
3996@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 3997@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
3998@cindex common symbol placement
3999@cindex uninitialized data placement
4000A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4001file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4002linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4003named @samp{COMMON}.
4004
4005You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4006other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4007particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4008input files are placed in another section.
4009
4010In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4011@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4012@smallexample
4013.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4014@end smallexample
4015
4016@cindex scommon section
4017@cindex small common symbols
4018Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4019example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4020symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4021different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4022the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4023symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4024to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4025locations.
4026
4027@cindex [COMMON]
4028You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4029notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4030@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4031
4032@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4033@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4034@cindex KEEP
4035@cindex garbage collection
4036When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4037it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4038This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4039with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4040@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4041
4042@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4043@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4044The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4045to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4046start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4047@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4048follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4049@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4050@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4051All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4052files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4053
4054@smallexample
4055@group
4056SECTIONS @{
4057 outputa 0x10000 :
4058 @{
4059 all.o
4060 foo.o (.input1)
4061 @}
36f63dca
NC
4062@end group
4063@group
252b5132
RH
4064 outputb :
4065 @{
4066 foo.o (.input2)
4067 foo1.o (.input1)
4068 @}
36f63dca
NC
4069@end group
4070@group
252b5132
RH
4071 outputc :
4072 @{
4073 *(.input1)
4074 *(.input2)
4075 @}
4076@}
4077@end group
a1ab1d2a 4078@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4079
4080@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4081@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4082@cindex data
4083@cindex section data
4084@cindex output section data
4085@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4086@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4087@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4088@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4089@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4090You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4091@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4092an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4093parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4094value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4095counter.
4096
4097The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4098store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4099bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4100stored.
4101
4102For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4103of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4104@smallexample
4105BYTE(1)
4106LONG(addr)
4107@end smallexample
4108
4109When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4110same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4111target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4112@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4113@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4114
4115If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4116which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4117When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4118true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4119endianness of the first input object file.
4120
36f63dca 4121Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4122between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4123@smallexample
4124SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4125@end smallexample
4126whereas this will work:
4127@smallexample
4128SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4129@end smallexample
4130
252b5132
RH
4131@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4132@cindex holes, filling
4133@cindex unspecified memory
4134You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4135current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4136otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4137gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4138with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4139necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4140point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4141than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4142different parts of an output section.
4143
4144This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4145value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4146@smallexample
563e308f 4147FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4148@end smallexample
4149
4150The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4151section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4152part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4153entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4154precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4155expression.
252b5132
RH
4156
4157@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4158@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4159There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4160commands.
4161
4162@table @code
4163@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4164@cindex input filename symbols
4165@cindex filename symbols
4166@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4167The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4168The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4169file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4170the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4171
4172This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4173normally used for any other object file format.
4174
4175@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4176@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4177@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4178@item CONSTRUCTORS
4179When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4180unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4181destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4182arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4183automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4184For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4185linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4186@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4187ignored for other object file formats.
4188
4189The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4190constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4191Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4192the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4193first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4194of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4195compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4196formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4197@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4198the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4199destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4200@code{exit}.
4201
4202For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4203arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4204addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4205and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4206linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4207runtime code expects to see.
4208
4209@smallexample
4210 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4211 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4212 *(.ctors)
4213 LONG(0)
4214 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4215 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4216 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4217 *(.dtors)
4218 LONG(0)
4219 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4220@end smallexample
4221
4222If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4223which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4224are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4225are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4226command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4227@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4228@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4229@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4230
4231Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4232and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4233need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4234scripts.
4235
4236@end table
4237
4238@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4239@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4240@cindex discarding sections
4241@cindex sections, discarding
4242@cindex removing sections
74541ad4
AM
4243The linker will not create output sections with no contents. This is
4244for convenience when referring to input sections that may or may not
4245be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4246@smallexample
49c13adb 4247.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4248@end smallexample
4249@noindent
4250will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4251@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4252sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4253space in an output section will also create the output section.
4254
a0976ea4 4255The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4256on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4257symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4258the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4259section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4260
4261@cindex /DISCARD/
4262The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4263input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4264section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4265
4266@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4267@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4268@cindex output section attributes
4269We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4270like this:
0c71d759 4271
252b5132 4272@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4273@group
7e7d5768 4274@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4275 [AT(@var{lma})]
4276 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4277 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4278 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4279 @{
4280 @var{output-section-command}
4281 @var{output-section-command}
4282 @dots{}
562d3460 4283 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4284@end group
4285@end smallexample
0c71d759 4286
252b5132
RH
4287We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4288@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4289remaining section attributes.
4290
a1ab1d2a 4291@menu
252b5132
RH
4292* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4293* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4294* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4295* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4296* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4297* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4298* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4299* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4300@end menu
4301
4302@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4303@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4304Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4305parentheses. The following types are defined:
4306
4307@table @code
4308@item NOLOAD
4309The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4310loaded into memory when the program is run.
4311@item DSECT
4312@itemx COPY
4313@itemx INFO
4314@itemx OVERLAY
4315These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4316rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4317marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4318section when the program is run.
4319@end table
4320
4321@kindex NOLOAD
4322@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4323@cindex loading, preventing
4324The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4325the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4326the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4327@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4328need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4329@smallexample
4330@group
4331SECTIONS @{
4332 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4333 @dots{}
4334@}
4335@end group
4336@end smallexample
4337
4338@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4339@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4340@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4341@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4342@cindex load address
4343@cindex section load address
4344Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4345@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4346@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4347specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4348address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4349
ea5cae92
NC
4350The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4351specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4352takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4353load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4354region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4355
4356If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4357section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4358load address:
4359
4360@itemize @bullet
4361@item
4362If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4363the LMA address as well.
4364
4365@item
4366If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4367
4368@item
4369Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4370with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4371section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4372VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4373the last section in the located region.
4374
4375@item
4376If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4377that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4378
4379@item
4380If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4381section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4382@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4383
4384@cindex ROM initialized data
4385@cindex initialized data in ROM
4386This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4387example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4388called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4389@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4390even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4391uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4392defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4393counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4394
4395@smallexample
4396@group
4397SECTIONS
4398 @{
4399 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4400 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4401 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4402 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4403 .bss 0x3000 :
4404 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4405@}
4406@end group
4407@end smallexample
4408
4409The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4410this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4411the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4412how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4413script.
4414
4415@smallexample
4416@group
4417extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4418char *src = &_etext;
4419char *dst = &_data;
4420
ea5cae92
NC
4421/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4422while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4423 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4424
ea5cae92 4425/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4426for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4427 *dst = 0;
4428@end group
4429@end smallexample
4430
bbf115d3
L
4431@node Forced Output Alignment
4432@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4433@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4434@cindex forcing output section alignment
4435@cindex output section alignment
7270c5ed 4436You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN.
bbf115d3 4437
7e7d5768
AM
4438@node Forced Input Alignment
4439@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4440@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4441@cindex forcing input section alignment
4442@cindex input section alignment
4443You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4444SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4445sections, whether larger or smaller.
4446
0c71d759
NC
4447@node Output Section Constraint
4448@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4449@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4450@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4451@cindex constraints on output sections
4452You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4453of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4454read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4455@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4456
252b5132 4457@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4458@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4459@kindex >@var{region}
4460@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4461@cindex memory regions and sections
4462You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4463using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4464
4465Here is a simple example:
4466@smallexample
4467@group
4468MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4469SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4470@end group
4471@end smallexample
4472
4473@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4474@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4475@kindex :@var{phdr}
4476@cindex section, assigning to program header
4477@cindex program headers and sections
4478You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4479using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4480one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4481assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4482@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4483linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4484
4485Here is a simple example:
4486@smallexample
4487@group
4488PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4489SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4490@end group
4491@end smallexample
4492
4493@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4494@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4495@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4496@cindex section fill pattern
4497@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4498You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4499@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4500(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4501within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4502alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4503necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4504of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4505an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4506fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4507other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4508pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4509expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4510
4511You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4512output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4513
4514Here is a simple example:
4515@smallexample
4516@group
563e308f 4517SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4518@end group
4519@end smallexample
4520
4521@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4522@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4523@kindex OVERLAY
4524@cindex overlays
4525An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4526are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4527the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4528copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4529required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4530can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4531than another.
4532
4533Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4534@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4535output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4536command is as follows:
4537@smallexample
4538@group
4539OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4540 @{
4541 @var{secname1}
4542 @{
4543 @var{output-section-command}
4544 @var{output-section-command}
4545 @dots{}
4546 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4547 @var{secname2}
4548 @{
4549 @var{output-section-command}
4550 @var{output-section-command}
4551 @dots{}
4552 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4553 @dots{}
4554 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4555@end group
4556@end smallexample
4557
4558Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4559section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4560section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
4561those within the general @code{SECTIONS} contruct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
4562except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4563sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4564
4565The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4566addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4567memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4568whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4569and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4570and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4571
4572If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there any references
4573among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since the sections
4574all run at the same address, it normally does not make sense for one
4575section to refer directly to another. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands,
4576NOCROSSREFS}.
4577
4578For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4579provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4580defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4581@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4582the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4583within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4584symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4585
4586At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4587the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4588
4589Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4590@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4591@smallexample
4592@group
4593 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4594 @{
4595 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4596 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
4597 @}
4598@end group
4599@end smallexample
4600@noindent
4601This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
4602address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
4603@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 4604following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
4605@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
4606@code{__load_stop_text1}.
4607
4608C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
4609like the following.
4610
4611@smallexample
4612@group
4613 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
4614 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
4615 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
4616@end group
4617@end smallexample
4618
4619Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
4620everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
4621example could have been written identically as follows.
4622
4623@smallexample
4624@group
4625 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4626 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
4627 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 4628 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
4629 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
4630 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
4631 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
4632@end group
4633@end smallexample
4634
4635@node MEMORY
36f63dca 4636@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
4637@kindex MEMORY
4638@cindex memory regions
4639@cindex regions of memory
4640@cindex allocating memory
4641@cindex discontinuous memory
4642The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
4643memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
4644
4645The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
4646memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
4647may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
4648can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
4649set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
4650regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
4651around to fit into the available regions.
4652
4653A linker script may contain at most one use of the @code{MEMORY}
4654command. However, you can define as many blocks of memory within it as
4655you wish. The syntax is:
4656@smallexample
4657@group
a1ab1d2a 4658MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4659 @{
4660 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
4661 @dots{}
4662 @}
4663@end group
4664@end smallexample
4665
4666The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
4667region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
4668Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4669with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
4670must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
4671add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
4672command.
252b5132
RH
4673
4674@cindex memory region attributes
4675The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
4676whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
4677not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
4678@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
4679section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
4680the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
4681them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
4682
4683The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
4684@table @samp
4685@item R
4686Read-only section
4687@item W
4688Read/write section
4689@item X
4690Executable section
4691@item A
4692Allocatable section
4693@item I
4694Initialized section
4695@item L
4696Same as @samp{I}
4697@item !
c09e9a8c 4698Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
4699@end table
4700
4701If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
4702@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
4703attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
4704in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
4705attributes.
4706
4707@kindex ORIGIN =
4708@kindex o =
4709@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
4710The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
4711the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
4712cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
4713abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
4714@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
4715
4716@kindex LENGTH =
4717@kindex len =
4718@kindex l =
4719The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
4720region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
4721be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
4722@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
4723
4724In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
4725available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
4726and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
4727linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
4728is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
4729or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
4730explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
4731region.
4732
4733@smallexample
4734@group
a1ab1d2a 4735MEMORY
252b5132
RH
4736 @{
4737 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
4738 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
4739 @}
4740@end group
4741@end smallexample
4742
4743Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
4744specific output sections into that memory region by using the
4745@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
4746a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
4747output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
4748was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
4749the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
4750output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
4751region, the linker will issue an error message.
4752
3ec57632 4753It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 4754expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
4755@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
4756
4757@smallexample
4758@group
c0065db7 4759 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
4760@end group
4761@end smallexample
4762
252b5132
RH
4763@node PHDRS
4764@section PHDRS Command
4765@kindex PHDRS
4766@cindex program headers
4767@cindex ELF program headers
4768@cindex program segments
4769@cindex segments, ELF
4770The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
4771@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
4772loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
4773program with the @samp{-p} option.
4774
4775When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
4776reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
4777program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
4778This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
4779interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
4780
4781The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
4782in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
4783precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
4784the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
4785not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
4786
4787The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
4788generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
4789ignore @code{PHDRS}.
4790
4791This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
4792@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
4793
4794@smallexample
4795@group
4796PHDRS
4797@{
4798 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
4799 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
4800@}
4801@end group
4802@end smallexample
4803
4804The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
4805of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
4806header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
4807with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
4808must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
4809is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
4810
4811Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
4812system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
4813specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
4814sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
4815attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
4816Section Phdr}.
4817
4818It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
4819merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
4820repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
4821contain the section.
4822
4823If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
4824then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
4825not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
4826convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
4827placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
4828default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
4829segment at all.
4830
4831@kindex FILEHDR
4832@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 4833You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
4834the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
4835The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
4836file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 4837include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
4838segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
4839these keywords.
252b5132
RH
4840
4841The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
4842value of the keyword.
4843
4844@table @asis
4845@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
4846Indicates an unused program header.
4847
4848@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
4849Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
4850the file.
4851
4852@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
4853Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
4854
4855@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
4856Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
4857found.
4858
4859@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
4860Indicates a segment holding note information.
4861
4862@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
4863A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
4864ABI.
4865
4866@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
4867Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
4868
4869@item @var{expression}
4870An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
4871be used for types not defined above.
4872@end table
4873
4874You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
4875in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
4876@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
4877Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
4878output section attribute.
4879
4880The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
4881which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
4882explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
4883an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
4884header.
4885
4886Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
4887headers used on a native ELF system.
4888
4889@example
4890@group
4891PHDRS
4892@{
4893 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
4894 interp PT_INTERP ;
4895 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
4896 data PT_LOAD ;
4897 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
4898@}
4899
4900SECTIONS
4901@{
4902 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
4903 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
4904 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
4905 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
4906 @dots{}
4907 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
4908 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
4909 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
4910 @dots{}
4911@}
4912@end group
4913@end example
4914
4915@node VERSION
4916@section VERSION Command
4917@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
4918@cindex symbol versions
4919@cindex version script
4920@cindex versions of symbols
4921The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
4922only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
4923symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
4924a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
4925shared library.
4926
4927You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
4928you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
4929also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
4930
4931The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
4932@smallexample
4933VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
4934@end smallexample
4935
4936The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
4937Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
4938version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
4939version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
4940version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
4941scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
4942library.
4943
4944The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
4945examples.
4946
4947@smallexample
4948VERS_1.1 @{
4949 global:
4950 foo1;
4951 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
4952 old*;
4953 original*;
4954 new*;
252b5132
RH
4955@};
4956
4957VERS_1.2 @{
4958 foo2;
4959@} VERS_1.1;
4960
4961VERS_2.0 @{
4962 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 4963 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 4964 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
4965 "f(int, double)";
4966 @};
252b5132
RH
4967@} VERS_1.2;
4968@end smallexample
4969
4970This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
4971version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
4972The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
4973a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
4974of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
4975symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
4976is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
4977in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
4978However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
4979name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
4980
4981Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
4982depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
4983to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
4984
4985Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
4986depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
4987and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
4988
4989When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
4990specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
4991unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 4992unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
4993somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
4994wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
4995wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
4996set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
4997ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
4998
4999The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5000they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5001could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5002However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5003
0f6bf451 5004Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5005in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5006symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5007won't.
5008
5009@smallexample
7c9c73be 5010@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5011@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5012
252b5132
RH
5013When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5014symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5015requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5016shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5017loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5018linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5019application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5020way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5021all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5022search for each symbol reference.
5023
5024The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5025doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5026that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5027functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5028the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5029required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5030that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5031versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5032the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5033
5034There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5035first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5036source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5037script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5038maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5039@smallexample
5040__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5041@end smallexample
5042@noindent
5043in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5044be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5045The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5046@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5047takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5048
5049The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5050function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5051an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5052version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5053linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5054
5055To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5056source file. Here is an example:
5057
5058@smallexample
5059__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5060__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5061__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5062__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5063@end smallexample
5064
5065In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5066unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5067example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5068@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5069
5070When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5071some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5072this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5073@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5074declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5075you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5076
5077If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5078within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5079(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5080specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5081
cb840a31
L
5082You can also specify the language in the version script:
5083
5084@smallexample
5085VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5086@end smallexample
5087
c0065db7 5088The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5089The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5090demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5091patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5092@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5093
86043bbb
MM
5094Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5095described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5096or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5097the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5098whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5099cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5100might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5101should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5102expect when you upgrade.
5103
252b5132
RH
5104@node Expressions
5105@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5106@cindex expressions
5107@cindex arithmetic
5108The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5109that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5110expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5111host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5112
5113You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5114
5115The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5116expressions.
5117
5118@menu
5119* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5120* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5121* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5122* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5123* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5124* Operators:: Operators
5125* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5126* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5127* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5128@end menu
5129
5130@node Constants
5131@subsection Constants
5132@cindex integer notation
5133@cindex constants in linker scripts
5134All constants are integers.
5135
5136As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5137octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8
NC
5138hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5139@samp{H} for hexadeciaml, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5140@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5141value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5142
5143@cindex scaled integers
5144@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5145@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5146@cindex suffixes for integers
5147@cindex integer suffixes
5148In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5149constant by
5150@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5151@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5152@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5153@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5154@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5155@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5156@tex
5157${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5158@end tex
5159@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5160respectively. For example, the following
5161all refer to the same quantity:
5162
252b5132 5163@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5164_fourk_1 = 4K;
5165_fourk_2 = 4096;
5166_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5167_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5168@end smallexample
5169
8a308ae8
NC
5170Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5171conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5172
0c71d759
NC
5173@node Symbolic Constants
5174@subsection Symbolic Constants
5175@cindex symbolic constants
5176@kindex CONSTANT
5177It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5178the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5179
5180@table @code
5181@item MAXPAGESIZE
5182@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5183The target's maximum page size.
5184
5185@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5186@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5187The target's default page size.
5188@end table
5189
5190So for example:
5191
5192@smallexample
5193 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5194@end smallexample
5195
5196will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5197supported by the target.
5198
252b5132
RH
5199@node Symbols
5200@subsection Symbol Names
5201@cindex symbol names
5202@cindex names
5203@cindex quoted symbol names
5204@kindex "
5205Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5206and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5207Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5208specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5209keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5210@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5211"SECTION" = 9;
5212"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5213@end smallexample
5214
5215Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5216to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5217whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5218
ecca9871
L
5219@node Orphan Sections
5220@subsection Orphan Sections
5221@cindex orphan
5222Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5223are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5224script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5225output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5226placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5227attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5228same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5229If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5230at the end of the file.
5231
5232For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5233well as section flag.
5234
41911f68 5235If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5236the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
41911f68
NC
5237__start_SECNAME and __end_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
5238section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5239orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5240representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5241character.
5242
252b5132
RH
5243@node Location Counter
5244@subsection The Location Counter
5245@kindex .
5246@cindex dot
5247@cindex location counter
5248@cindex current output location
5249The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5250current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5251location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5252within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5253anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5254
5255@cindex holes
5256Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5257moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5258location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5259and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5260doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5261
5262@smallexample
5263SECTIONS
5264@{
5265 output :
5266 @{
5267 file1(.text)
5268 . = . + 1000;
5269 file2(.text)
5270 . += 1000;
5271 file3(.text)
563e308f 5272 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5273@}
5274@end smallexample
5275@noindent
5276In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5277located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5278followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5279@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5280@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5281specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5282
5c6bbab8
NC
5283@cindex dot inside sections
5284Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5285current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5286statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5287absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5288however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5289not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5290
5291@smallexample
5292SECTIONS
5293@{
5294 . = 0x100
5295 .text: @{
5296 *(.text)
5297 . = 0x200
5298 @}
5299 . = 0x500
5300 .data: @{
5301 *(.data)
5302 . += 0x600
5303 @}
5304@}
5305@end smallexample
5306
5307The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5308and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5309the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5310much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5311move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5312and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5313the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5314the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5315
b5666f2f
AM
5316@cindex dot outside sections
5317Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5318output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5319needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5320
5321@smallexample
5322SECTIONS
5323@{
5324 start_of_text = . ;
5325 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5326 end_of_text = . ;
5327
5328 start_of_data = . ;
5329 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5330 end_of_data = . ;
5331@}
5332@end smallexample
5333
5334If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5335not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5336between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5337should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5338blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5339the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5340sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5341statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5342special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5343place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5344as follows:
5345
5346@smallexample
5347SECTIONS
5348@{
5349 start_of_text = . ;
5350 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5351 end_of_text = . ;
5352
5353 start_of_data = . ;
5354 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5355 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5356 end_of_data = . ;
5357@}
5358@end smallexample
5359
5360This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5361@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5362placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5363assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5364a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5365section. So you could write:
5366
5367@smallexample
5368SECTIONS
5369@{
5370 start_of_text = . ;
5371 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5372 end_of_text = . ;
5373
5374 . = . ;
5375 start_of_data = . ;
5376 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5377 end_of_data = . ;
5378@}
5379@end smallexample
5380
5381Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5382@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5383
252b5132
RH
5384@need 2000
5385@node Operators
5386@subsection Operators
5387@cindex operators for arithmetic
5388@cindex arithmetic operators
5389@cindex precedence in expressions
5390The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5391the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5392@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5393@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5394@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5395@smallexample
5396precedence associativity Operators Notes
5397(highest)
53981 left ! - ~ (1)
53992 left * / %
54003 left + -
54014 left >> <<
54025 left == != > < <= >=
54036 left &
54047 left |
54058 left &&
54069 left ||
540710 right ? :
540811 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5409(lowest)
5410@end smallexample
5411Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5412(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5413(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5414@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5415@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5416@tex
5417\vskip \baselineskip
5418%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5419\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5420\hrule
5421\halign
5422{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5423height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5424&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5425height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5426\noalign{\hrule}
5427height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5428&highest&&&&&\cr
5429% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5430&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5431&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5432&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5433&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5434&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5435&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5436&7&&left&&|&\cr
5437&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5438&9&&left&&||&\cr
5439&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5440&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5441&lowest&&&&&\cr
5442height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5443\hrule}
5444@end tex
5445@iftex
5446{
5447@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5448@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5449@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5450}
5451@end iftex
5452@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5453
5454@node Evaluation
5455@subsection Evaluation
5456@cindex lazy evaluation
5457@cindex expression evaluation order
5458The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5459an expression when absolutely necessary.
5460
5461The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5462address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5463regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5464as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5465
5466However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5467until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5468other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5469for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5470
5471The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5472assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5473allocation.
5474
5475Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5476@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5477
5478If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5479available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5480following
5481@smallexample
5482@group
5483SECTIONS
5484 @{
a1ab1d2a 5485 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5486 @{ *(.text) @}
5487 @}
5488@end group
5489@end smallexample
5490@noindent
5491will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5492address}.
5493
5494@node Expression Section
5495@subsection The Section of an Expression
5496@cindex expression sections
5497@cindex absolute expressions
5498@cindex relative expressions
5499@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5500@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5501@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5502Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5503relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5504using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5505value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5506symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5507operations.
5508
abf4be64
AM
5509Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5510section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5511address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5512@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5513functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5514One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5515(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5516differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5517versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5518section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5519Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5520absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5521given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5522everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5523
5524In the following simple example,
252b5132 5525
7542af2a
AM
5526@smallexample
5527@group
5528SECTIONS
5529 @{
5530 . = 0x100;
5531 __executable_start = 0x100;
5532 .data :
5533 @{
5534 . = 0x10;
5535 __data_start = 0x10;
5536 *(.data)
5537 @}
5538 @dots{}
5539 @}
5540@end group
5541@end smallexample
252b5132 5542
7542af2a
AM
5543both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5544address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5545@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5546section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5547
5c3049d2
AM
5548For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5549addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5550
5551@itemize @bullet
5552@item
5553Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5554relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5555and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5556@item
5557Unary operations on an absolute address, and binary operations on one
5558or more absolute addresses or on two relative addresses not in the
5559same section, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute
5560address before applying the operator.
5561@end itemize
5562
5563The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5564
5565@itemize @bullet
5566@item
5567An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5568@item
5569The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5570@item
9bc8bb33
AM
5571The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
5572relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresess
5573(after above conversions) is also a number.
5574@item
5575The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5576relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5577section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5578@item
5579The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5580conversions) is an absolute address.
5581@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5582
5583You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5584to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5585create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5586section @samp{.data}:
5587@smallexample
5588SECTIONS
5589 @{
5590 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
5591 @}
5592@end smallexample
5593@noindent
5594If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
5595@samp{.data} section.
5596
7542af2a
AM
5597Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
5598particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
5599
252b5132
RH
5600@node Builtin Functions
5601@subsection Builtin Functions
5602@cindex functions in expressions
5603The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
5604use in linker script expressions.
5605
5606@table @code
5607@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5608@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
5609@cindex expression, absolute
5610Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
5611of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
5612value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
5613normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
5614
5615@item ADDR(@var{section})
5616@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
5617@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 5618Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 5619script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
5620the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
5621@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
5622@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
5623the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
5624@smallexample
5625@group
5626SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5627 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 5628 @{
252b5132
RH
5629 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
5630 @dots{}
5631 @}
5632 .output :
5633 @{
5634 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
5635 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
5636 @}
5637@dots{} @}
5638@end group
5639@end smallexample
5640
876f4090
NS
5641@item ALIGN(@var{align})
5642@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
5643@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
5644@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
5645@cindex round up location counter
5646@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
5647@cindex round up expression
5648@cindex align expression
5649Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
5650to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
5651doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
5652arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
5653expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
5654equivalent to @code{ALIGN(., @var{align})}).
5655
5656Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
5657next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
5658variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
5659input sections:
252b5132
RH
5660@smallexample
5661@group
5662SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5663 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
5664 *(.data)
5665 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
5666 @}
5667@dots{} @}
5668@end group
5669@end smallexample
5670@noindent
5671The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
5672a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
5673a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
5674of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
5675
5676The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
5677
362c1d1a
NS
5678@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5679@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
5680@cindex section alignment
5681Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5682been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5683evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5684the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
5685value in that section.
5686@smallexample
5687@group
5688SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5689 .output @{
5690 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
5691 @dots{}
5692 @}
5693@dots{} @}
5694@end group
5695@end smallexample
5696
252b5132
RH
5697@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
5698@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
5699This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
5700scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
5701section.
5702
2d20f7bf
JJ
5703@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5704@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
5705This is equivalent to either
5706@smallexample
5707(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
5708@end smallexample
5709or
5710@smallexample
5711(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
5712@end smallexample
5713@noindent
5714depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
5715for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
5716@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
5717If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
5718memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
5719bytes in the on-disk file.
5720
5721This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
5722any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
5723@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
5724be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
5725working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
5726
5727@noindent
5728Example:
5729@smallexample
5730 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
5731@end smallexample
5732
5733@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5734@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
5735This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
5736evaluation purposes.
5737
5738@smallexample
5739 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
5740@end smallexample
5741
a4f5ad88
JJ
5742@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5743@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
5744This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
5745@samp{-z relro} option is used. Second argument is returned.
5746When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
5747does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
5748@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
5749boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
5750it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
5751@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}.
5752
5753@smallexample
5754 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
5755@end smallexample
5756
252b5132
RH
5757@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5758@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
5759@cindex symbol defaults
5760Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
5761defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
5762return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
5763default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
5764shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
5765the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
5766existed, its value is preserved:
5767
5768@smallexample
5769@group
5770SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
5771 .text : @{
5772 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
5773 @dots{}
5774 @}
5775 @dots{}
5776@}
5777@end group
5778@end smallexample
5779
3ec57632
NC
5780@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
5781@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
5782Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5783
252b5132
RH
5784@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
5785@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
5786@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 5787Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
5788Section LMA}).
5789
5790@kindex MAX
5791@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5792Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5793
5794@kindex MIN
5795@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
5796Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
5797
5798@item NEXT(@var{exp})
5799@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
5800@cindex unallocated address, next
5801Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
5802This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
5803use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
5804output file, the two functions are equivalent.
5805
3ec57632
NC
5806@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5807@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
5808Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
5809
ba916c8a
MM
5810@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5811@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
5812Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
5813value has been given for this segment (with a command-line @samp{-T}
5814option) that value will be returned; otherwise the value will be
5815@var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option can only
5816be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 5817``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
5818name.
5819
252b5132
RH
5820@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
5821@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
5822@cindex section size
5823Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
5824been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
5825evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
5826@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
5827@smallexample
5828@group
5829SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
5830 .output @{
5831 .start = . ;
5832 @dots{}
5833 .end = . ;
5834 @}
5835 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
5836 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
5837@dots{} @}
5838@end group
5839@end smallexample
5840
5841@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
5842@itemx sizeof_headers
5843@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
5844@cindex header size
5845Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
5846information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
5847this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
5848choose, to facilitate paging.
5849
5850@cindex not enough room for program headers
5851@cindex program headers, not enough room
5852When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
5853@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
5854number of program headers before it has determined all the section
5855addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
5856additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
5857room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
5858the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
5859script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
5860you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
5861command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
5862@end table
5863
5864@node Implicit Linker Scripts
5865@section Implicit Linker Scripts
5866@cindex implicit linker scripts
5867If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
5868an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
5869linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
5870linker will report an error.
5871
5872An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
5873
5874Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
5875assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
5876commands.
5877
5878Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
5879at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
5880read. This can affect archive searching.
5881
5882@ifset GENERIC
5883@node Machine Dependent
5884@chapter Machine Dependent Features
5885
5886@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
5887@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
5888sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
5889functionality are not listed.
5890
5891@menu
36f63dca
NC
5892@ifset H8300
5893* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
5894@end ifset
5895@ifset I960
5896* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
5897@end ifset
5898@ifset ARM
5899* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
5900@end ifset
5901@ifset HPPA
5902* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
5903@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
5904@ifset M68K
5905* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
5906@end ifset
3c3bdf30 5907@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 5908* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 5909@end ifset
2469cfa2 5910@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 5911* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 5912@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
5913@ifset M68HC11
5914* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
5915@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
5916@ifset POWERPC
5917* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
5918@end ifset
5919@ifset POWERPC64
5920* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
5921@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
5922@ifset SPU
5923* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
5924@end ifset
74459f0e 5925@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 5926* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 5927@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
5928@ifset WIN32
5929* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
5930@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
5931@ifset XTENSA
5932* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
5933@end ifset
252b5132
RH
5934@end menu
5935@end ifset
5936
252b5132
RH
5937@ifset H8300
5938@ifclear GENERIC
5939@raisesections
5940@end ifclear
5941
5942@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 5943@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
5944
5945@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 5946For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
5947you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
5948
5949@table @emph
5950@cindex relaxing on H8/300
5951@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 5952@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
5953targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
5954program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
5955respectively.
5956
5957@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
5958@item synthesizing instructions
5959@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really?
ff5dcc92 5960@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
5961sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
5962page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
5963(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
5964@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
5965top page of memory).
1502569c
NC
5966
5967@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 5968@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 5969biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 5970which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
5971page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
5972(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 5973@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
5974the top page of memory).
5975
5976@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
5977@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
597832 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
5979changes them to use 16 bit address form.
5980(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 5981@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 5982the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
5983@end table
5984
5985@ifclear GENERIC
5986@lowersections
5987@end ifclear
5988@end ifset
5989
36f63dca 5990@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 5991@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 5992@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
5993@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
5994@node Renesas
5995@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 5996
c2dcd04e
NC
5997@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
5998H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
5999options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6000@end ifset
6001@end ifclear
6002
6003@ifset I960
6004@ifclear GENERIC
6005@raisesections
6006@end ifclear
6007
6008@node i960
6009@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6010
6011@cindex i960 support
6012
6013You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6014specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6015family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6016incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6017linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6018libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6019search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6020
6021For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6022well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6023paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6024the names
6025
6026@smallexample
6027@group
6028try
6029libtry.a
6030tryca
6031libtryca.a
6032@end group
6033@end smallexample
6034
6035@noindent
6036The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6037two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6038
6039You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6040the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6041use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6042specifies a library.
6043
6044@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6045@cindex relaxing on i960
6046@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6047you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6048@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6049them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6050instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6051instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6052target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6053not itself call any subroutines).
6054
48229727
JB
6055@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6056@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6057@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6058The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6059
6060The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6061
85fdf906
AH
6062@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6063@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6064The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6065
36f63dca
NC
6066@ifclear GENERIC
6067@lowersections
6068@end ifclear
6069@end ifset
6070
6071@ifset ARM
6072@ifclear GENERIC
6073@raisesections
6074@end ifclear
6075
93fd0973
SC
6076@ifset M68HC11
6077@ifclear GENERIC
6078@raisesections
6079@end ifclear
6080
6081@node M68HC11/68HC12
6082@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6083
6084@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6085
6086@subsection Linker Relaxation
6087
6088For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6089optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6090
6091@table @emph
6092@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6093@item relaxing address modes
6094@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6095targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6096program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6097respectively.
6098
6099@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6100transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6101page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6102
6103@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6104When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6105of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6106addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6107@code{bset} instructions.
6108
6109@end table
6110
6111@subsection Trampoline Generation
6112
6113@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6114@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6115For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6116call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6117will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6118trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6119case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6120point to the function trampoline.
6121
6122@ifclear GENERIC
6123@lowersections
6124@end ifclear
6125@end ifset
6126
36f63dca 6127@node ARM
3674e28a 6128@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6129
6130@cindex ARM interworking support
6131@kindex --support-old-code
6132For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6133between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6134been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6135line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6136libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6137option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6138given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6139which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6140the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6141non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6142
6143@cindex thumb entry point
6144@cindex entry point, thumb
6145@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6146The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6147@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6148But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6149branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6150executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6151
ce11ba6c
KT
6152@cindex PE import table prefixing
6153@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6154The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6155the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6156elememt prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6157import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6158
e489d0ae
PB
6159@cindex BE8
6160@kindex --be8
6161The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6162executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian objects.
6163The resulting image will contain big-endian data and little-endian code.
6164
3674e28a
PB
6165@cindex TARGET1
6166@kindex --target1-rel
6167@kindex --target1-abs
6168The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6169@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6170or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6171and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6172
6173@cindex TARGET2
6174@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6175The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6176@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6177meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6178@table @samp
6179@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6180@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6181@item abs
6182@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6183@item got-rel
6184@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6185@end table
6186
319850b4
JB
6187@cindex FIX_V4BX
6188@kindex --fix-v4bx
6189The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6190specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6191interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6192also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6193
6194In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6195linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6196@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6197
6198In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6199relocations are ignored.
6200
845b51d6
PB
6201@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6202@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6203Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6204relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6205
6206@smallexample
6207TST rM, #1
6208MOVEQ PC, rM
6209BX Rn
6210@end smallexample
6211
6212This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6213and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6214condition flags, so may cause incorrect progrm behavior in rare cases.
6215
33bfe774
JB
6216@cindex USE_BLX
6217@kindex --use-blx
6218The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6219BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6220situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6221code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6222each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6223
6224This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6225specify it if you are using that target.
6226
c6dd86c6
JB
6227@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6228@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6229The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6230bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6231instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6232to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6233the support code can read the intended values.
6234
6235The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6236intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6237and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6238intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6239full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6240you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6241
6242If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6243enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6244@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6245mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6246vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6247@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6248
6249If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6250potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6251such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6252first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6253instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6254the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6255are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6256
bf21ed78
MS
6257@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6258@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6259The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6260warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6261enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6262linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6263using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6264not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6265
6266@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6267@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6268The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6269warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6270@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6271linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6272using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6273
726150b7
NC
6274@cindex PIC_VENEER
6275@kindex --pic-veneer
6276The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6277ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6278is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6279@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6280
6281@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6282@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6283The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6284code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6285perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6286placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6287controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6288The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
6289duplicate stubs, increasing the code sizw. The linker will try to
6290group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6291code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6292where they should be placed.
6293
6294The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6295@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6296placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6297branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6298placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6299value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6300exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6301A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6302linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6303from the input sections.
6304
6305The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6306@samp{N = +1}.
6307
1a51c1a4
NC
6308Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6309only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6310otherwise.
6311
36f63dca
NC
6312@ifclear GENERIC
6313@lowersections
6314@end ifclear
6315@end ifset
6316
6317@ifset HPPA
6318@ifclear GENERIC
6319@raisesections
6320@end ifclear
6321
6322@node HPPA ELF32
6323@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6324@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6325@kindex --multi-subspace
6326When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6327import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6328The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6329stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6330multiple sub-spaces.
6331
6332@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6333@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6334Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6335stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6336@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6337sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6338a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6339the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6340conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6341prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6342A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6343branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6344@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6345@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6346detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6347positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6348
6349Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6350single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6351create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6352large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6353
6354@ifclear GENERIC
6355@lowersections
6356@end ifclear
6357@end ifset
6358
7fb9f789
NC
6359@ifset M68K
6360@ifclear GENERIC
6361@raisesections
6362@end ifclear
6363
6364@node M68K
6365@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6366
6367@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6368@kindex --got=@var{type}
6369The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6370The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6371@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6372the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6373@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6374entries only at non-negative offsets.
6375@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6376entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6377support such GOTs.
6378@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6379output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6380file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6381files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6382
6383@ifclear GENERIC
6384@lowersections
6385@end ifclear
6386@end ifset
6387
36f63dca
NC
6388@ifset MMIX
6389@ifclear GENERIC
6390@raisesections
6391@end ifclear
6392
6393@node MMIX
6394@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6395For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6396@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6397understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6398can translate between the two formats.
6399
6400There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6401Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6402registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6403equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6404@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6405global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6406this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6407symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6408
7a2de473
HPN
6409Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6410@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6411The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6412of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6413
6414Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6415are left out from an mmo file.
6416
6417@ifclear GENERIC
6418@lowersections
6419@end ifclear
6420@end ifset
6421
6422@ifset MSP430
6423@ifclear GENERIC
6424@raisesections
6425@end ifclear
6426
6427@node MSP430
6428@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6429For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6430will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6431just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6432
6433@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6434The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6435
6436@table @code
6437@item @samp{.vectors}
6438Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6439
6440@item @samp{.bootloader}
6441Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6442in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6443
6444@item @samp{.infomem}
6445Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6446this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6447
c0065db7 6448@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6449This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6450in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6451
6452@item @samp{.noinit}
6453Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6454
c0065db7 6455The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6456@end table
6457
6458@ifclear GENERIC
6459@lowersections
6460@end ifclear
6461@end ifset
6462
2a60a7a8
AM
6463@ifset POWERPC
6464@ifclear GENERIC
6465@raisesections
6466@end ifclear
6467
6468@node PowerPC ELF32
6469@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6470@cindex PowerPC long branches
6471@kindex --relax on PowerPC
6472Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
6473displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
6474@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
6475@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
6476the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
6477section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
6478section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
6479@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
6480both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
6481considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
6482
6483@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
6484@table @option
6485@cindex PowerPC PLT
6486@kindex --bss-plt
6487@item --bss-plt
6488Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
6489generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
6490the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
6491writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
6492@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
6493PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
6494compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
6495BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
6496
016687f8
AM
6497@kindex --secure-plt
6498@item --secure-plt
6499@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
6500@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
6501when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
6502layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
6503style BSS PLT.
6504
2a60a7a8
AM
6505@cindex PowerPC GOT
6506@kindex --sdata-got
6507@item --sdata-got
6508The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
6509sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
6510@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
6511section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
6512@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
6513@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
6514@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
6515@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
6516PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
6517pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
6518GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
6519really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
6520
6521@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
6522@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6523@item --emit-stub-syms
6524This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6525symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6526
6527@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
6528@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6529@item --no-tls-optimize
6530PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6531sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6532disable the optimization.
6533@end table
6534
6535@ifclear GENERIC
6536@lowersections
6537@end ifclear
6538@end ifset
6539
6540@ifset POWERPC64
6541@ifclear GENERIC
6542@raisesections
6543@end ifclear
6544
6545@node PowerPC64 ELF64
6546@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6547
6548@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
6549@table @option
6550@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
6551@kindex --stub-group-size
6552@item --stub-group-size
6553Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
6554by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6555@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6556sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6557a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6558the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6559conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6560prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6561A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6562branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6563@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6564@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6565detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6566positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6567
6568Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6569single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6570create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6571large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6572
6573@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
6574@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6575@item --emit-stub-syms
6576This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
6577symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6578
6579@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
6580@kindex --dotsyms
6581@kindex --no-dotsyms
6582@item --dotsyms, --no-dotsyms
6583These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
6584in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
6585function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
6586code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
6587properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
6588to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
6589@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
6590dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
6591feature.
6592
6593@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
6594@kindex --no-tls-optimize
6595@item --no-tls-optimize
6596PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
6597sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
6598disable the optimization.
6599
6600@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
6601@kindex --no-opd-optimize
6602@item --no-opd-optimize
6603PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
6604corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 6605the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
6606Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
6607
6608@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
6609@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
6610@item --non-overlapping-opd
6611Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
6612@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
6613the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
6614entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
6615
6616@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
6617@kindex --no-toc-optimize
6618@item --no-toc-optimize
6619PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
6620entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
6621reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
6622marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
6623marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
6624relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
6625unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
6626reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
6627discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
6628reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
6629code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
6630optimization.
6631
6632@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
6633@kindex --no-multi-toc
6634@item --no-multi-toc
6635By default, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model where TOC
6636entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
6637total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
6638grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
6639TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
6640calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
6641help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
664264K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
6643Use this option to turn off this feature.
6644@end table
6645
6646@ifclear GENERIC
6647@lowersections
6648@end ifclear
6649@end ifset
6650
49fa1e15
AM
6651@ifset SPU
6652@ifclear GENERIC
6653@raisesections
6654@end ifclear
6655
6656@node SPU ELF
6657@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6658
6659@cindex SPU ELF options
6660@table @option
6661
6662@cindex SPU plugins
6663@kindex --plugin
6664@item --plugin
6665This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
6666
6667@cindex SPU overlays
6668@kindex --no-overlays
6669@item --no-overlays
6670Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
6671regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
6672@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
6673turns off all this special overlay handling.
6674
6675@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
6676@kindex --emit-stub-syms
6677@item --emit-stub-syms
6678This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
6679symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
6680
6681@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
6682@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
6683@item --extra-overlay-stubs
6684This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
6685function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
6686on calls to non-overlay regions.
6687
6688@cindex SPU local store size
6689@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
6690@item --local-store=lo:hi
6691@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
6692the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
6693range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
6694
c0065db7 6695@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6696@kindex --stack-analysis
6697@item --stack-analysis
6698SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
6699unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
6700under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
6701@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
6702@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
6703determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
6704for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
6705for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
6706for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
6707find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
6708and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
6709under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
6710dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
6711is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
6712and calls will be given.
6713
c0065db7 6714@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
6715@kindex --emit-stack-syms
6716@item --emit-stack-syms
6717This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
6718in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
6719These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
6720functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
6721functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
6722such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
6723The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 6724@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
6725@end table
6726
6727@ifclear GENERIC
6728@lowersections
6729@end ifclear
6730@end ifset
6731
36f63dca
NC
6732@ifset TICOFF
6733@ifclear GENERIC
6734@raisesections
6735@end ifclear
6736
6737@node TI COFF
6738@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
6739@cindex TI COFF versions
6740@kindex --format=@var{version}
6741The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
6742TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
6743also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
6744format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
6745header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
6746
6747@ifclear GENERIC
6748@lowersections
6749@end ifclear
6750@end ifset
6751
2ca22b03
NC
6752@ifset WIN32
6753@ifclear GENERIC
6754@raisesections
6755@end ifclear
6756
6757@node WIN32
6758@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6759
c0065db7 6760This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 6761See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 6762command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
6763
6764@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
6765@cindex import libraries
6766@item import libraries
69da35b5 6767The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 6768libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
6769regular static archives and are handled as any other static
6770archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
6771support for creating such libraries provided with the
6772@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
6773
c0065db7
RM
6774@item exporting DLL symbols
6775@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
6776The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
6777
6778@table @emph
6779@item using auto-export functionality
6780@cindex using auto-export functionality
6781By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
6782which is controlled by the following command line options:
6783
0a5d968e
NC
6784@itemize
6785@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
6786@item --exclude-symbols
6787@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 6788@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 6789@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
6790@end itemize
6791
09e2aba4
DK
6792When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
6793(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
6794symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
6795often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
6796private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
6797options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
6798exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
6799final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
6800
6801If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
6802command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
6803if either of the following are true:
6804
6805@itemize
6806@item A DEF file is used.
6807@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
6808@end itemize
dc8465bf 6809
c0065db7
RM
6810@item using a DEF file
6811@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
6812Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
6813an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
6814exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
6815name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 6816command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
6817
6818@example
6819gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
6820@end example
6821
0a5d968e
NC
6822Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
6823@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6824
dc8465bf
NC
6825Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
6826
6827@example
4b5bd4e7 6828LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
6829
6830EXPORTS
6831foo
6832bar
6833_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
6834another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
6835var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
6836doo = foo == foo2
6837eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 6838@end example
dc8465bf 6839
7fcab871 6840This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
6841symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
6842alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
6843by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
6844@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
6845@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
6846export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
6847in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
6848symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 6849
6b31ad16
DS
6850The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
6851name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
6852the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
6853
b45619c0
NC
6854When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
6855library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 6856@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 6857executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
6858
6859With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
6860specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 6861non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
6862
6863If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
6864or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
6865filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 6866
4b5bd4e7
DS
6867The complete specification of an export symbol is:
6868
6869@example
6870EXPORTS
6871 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
6872 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 6873 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 6874@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
6875
6876Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
6877@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
6878@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
6879@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
6880Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
6881@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
6882string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
6883
6884The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
6885
6886@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
6887will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
6888by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
6889linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
6890library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
6891
6892@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
6893The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
6894the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
6895@code{*_imp__foo}).
6896
6897@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
6898well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
6899read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
6900variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
6901the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
6902extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
6903application will behave unexpectedly.
6904
6905@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
6906it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
6907symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
6908API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
6909the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 6910
4b5bd4e7
DS
6911See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
6912other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
6913
6914@cindex creating a DEF file
6915While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
6916with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
6917
6918@item Using decorations
6919@cindex Using decorations
6920Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
6921itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
6922declared as:
6923
6924@example
6925__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
6926__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
6927@end example
6928
6929All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
6930any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
6931this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
6932the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
6933
6934Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 6935decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
6936instead:
6937
6938@example
6939__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
6940__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
6941@end example
6942
c0065db7
RM
6943This complicates the structure of library header files, because
6944when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
6945variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
6946code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 6947of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
6948omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
6949@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 6950information.
c0065db7 6951@end table
dc8465bf 6952
2ca22b03
NC
6953@cindex automatic data imports
6954@item automatic data imports
6955The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 6956by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 6957compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 6958issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 6959code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 6960c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 6961initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 6962decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 6963platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
6964command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
6965The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
6966suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
6967trigger the feature's use.
6968
c0065db7 6969auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
6970additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
6971
c0065db7 6972"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
6973documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
6974
c0065db7
RM
6975The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
6976occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
6977One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
6978below.
6979
6980@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
6981For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
6982object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
6983offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
6984field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
6985in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 6986without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 6987The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
6988references.
6989
c0065db7
RM
6990The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
6991be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
6992themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
6993runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
6994compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
6995support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
6996run without error on an older system.
6997
c0065db7
RM
6998@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
6999enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7000
7001@cindex direct linking to a dll
7002@item direct linking to a dll
7003The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7004including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7005libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7006traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7007libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7008function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7009though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7010storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7011tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7012large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7013
c0065db7 7014Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7015@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7016of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7017perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7018select the dll instead of an import library.
7019
2ca22b03 7020
69da35b5
NC
7021For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7022to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7023
7024@example
45e948fe
NC
7025libxxx.dll.a
7026xxx.dll.a
7027libxxx.a
7028xxx.lib
69da35b5 7029cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7030libxxx.dll
7031xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7032@end example
7033
69da35b5
NC
7034before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7035
c0065db7
RM
7036(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7037where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7038@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7039file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7040@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7041
c0065db7
RM
7042Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7043@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7044was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7045various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7046could coexist on the same machine.
7047
2ca22b03
NC
7048The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7049applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7050libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7051
7052@example
7053bin/
7054 cygxxx.dll
7055lib/
7056 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7057 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7058@end example
7059
c0065db7
RM
7060Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7061done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7062
70631. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7064@example
7065gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7066@end example
2ca22b03 7067
69da35b5
NC
7068However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7069(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7070@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7071not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7072
2ca22b03
NC
70732. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7074directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7075should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7076making the app/dll.
7077
7078@example
7079ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7080@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7081
7082Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7083
7084@example
7085gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7086@end example
69da35b5
NC
7087
7088This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7089perfectly legal
7090
7091@example
7092bin/
7093 cygxxx-5.dll
7094lib/
c0065db7 7095 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7096@end example
7097
dc8465bf 7098Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7099even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7100@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7101
7102Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7103wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7104
71051. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7106work with auto-imported data.
7107
dc8465bf
NC
71082. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7109import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7110symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7111for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7112possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7113
45e948fe
NC
71143. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7115critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7116in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7117stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7118
69da35b5 7119So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7120true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7121a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7122binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7123massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7124requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7125will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7126
c0065db7 7127@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7128@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7129@item adding additional names
7130Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7131A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7132exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7133when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7134import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7135
c0065db7 7136@example
dc8465bf
NC
7137LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7138
7139EXPORTS
c0065db7 7140foo
dc8465bf 7141_foo = foo
c0065db7 7142@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7143
7144The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7145
7146Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7147source code using the "weak" attribute:
7148
c0065db7
RM
7149@example
7150void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7151void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7152@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7153
7154See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7155symbols.
7156
7157@item renaming symbols
7158Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7159kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7160@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7161DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7162created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7163
c0065db7 7164@example
dc8465bf
NC
7165LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7166
7167EXPORTS
7168_foo = foo
c0065db7 7169@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7170
7171The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7172@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7173@end table
dc8465bf 7174
0a5d968e 7175Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7176unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7177If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7178@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7179that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7180@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7181renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7182to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7183the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7184In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7185which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7186
7187@cindex weak externals
7188@item weak externals
7189The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7190weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7191defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7192are three variants of weak externals:
7193@itemize
7194@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7195called lazy externals.
7196@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7197This form is not presently implemented.
7198@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7199implemented.
7200@end itemize
7201As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7202are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7203uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7204
7205@cindex aligned common symbols
7206@item aligned common symbols
7207As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7208desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7209the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7210carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7211by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7212tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7213but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7214warnings about unknown linker directives.
2ca22b03
NC
7215@end table
7216
7217@ifclear GENERIC
7218@lowersections
7219@end ifclear
7220@end ifset
7221
e0001a05
NC
7222@ifset XTENSA
7223@ifclear GENERIC
7224@raisesections
7225@end ifclear
7226
7227@node Xtensa
7228@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7229
7230@cindex Xtensa processors
7231The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7232@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7233specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7234keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7235example, with the command:
7236
7237@smallexample
7238SECTIONS
7239@{
7240 .text : @{
7241 *(.literal .text)
7242 @}
7243@}
7244@end smallexample
7245
7246@noindent
7247@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7248and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7249literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7250interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7251group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7252files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7253and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7254
43cd72b9 7255@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7256@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7257Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7258provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7259is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7260literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7261will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7262location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7263the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7264unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7265@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7266range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7267
7268For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7269to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7270instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7271instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7272instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7273@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7274hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7275By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7276switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7277density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7278instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7279performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7280linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7281a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7282
7283The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7284control the linker:
7285
7286@cindex Xtensa options
7287@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7288@item --size-opt
7289When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7290more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7291no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7292alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7293preserve the correctness of the code.
7294@end table
e0001a05
NC
7295
7296@ifclear GENERIC
7297@lowersections
7298@end ifclear
7299@end ifset
7300
252b5132
RH
7301@ifclear SingleFormat
7302@node BFD
7303@chapter BFD
7304
7305@cindex back end
7306@cindex object file management
7307@cindex object formats available
7308@kindex objdump -i
7309The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
7310These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
7311object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
7312format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
7313it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
7314associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
7315object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
7316(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
7317list all the formats available for your configuration.
7318
7319@cindex BFD requirements
7320@cindex requirements for BFD
7321As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
7322several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
7323BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
7324formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
7325been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
7326BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
7327may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
7328
7329One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
7330mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
7331useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
7332conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
7333
7334@menu
7335* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
7336@end menu
7337
7338@node BFD outline
36f63dca 7339@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
7340@cindex opening object files
7341@include bfdsumm.texi
7342@end ifclear
7343
7344@node Reporting Bugs
7345@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
7346@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
7347@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 7348
ff5dcc92 7349Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
7350
7351Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
7352it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 7353to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 7354work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 7355@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7356
7357In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
7358information that enables us to fix the bug.
7359
7360@menu
7361* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
7362* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
7363@end menu
7364
7365@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 7366@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
7367@cindex bug criteria
7368
7369If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
7370
7371@itemize @bullet
7372@cindex fatal signal
7373@cindex linker crash
7374@cindex crash of linker
7375@item
7376If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 7377@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
7378
7379@cindex error on valid input
7380@item
ff5dcc92 7381If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
7382
7383@cindex invalid input
7384@item
ff5dcc92 7385If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
7386may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
7387object files are correct.
7388
7389@item
7390If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 7391improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
7392@end itemize
7393
7394@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 7395@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 7396@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 7397@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
7398
7399A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 7400products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
7401recommend you contact that organization first.
7402
7403You can find contact information for many support companies and
7404individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
7405distribution.
7406
ad22bfe8 7407@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 7408Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
7409@value{BUGURL}.
7410@end ifset
252b5132
RH
7411
7412The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
7413@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
7414fact or leave it out, state it!
7415
7416Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
7417problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
7418assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
7419matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
7420the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
7421location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
7422were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
7423into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
7424specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 7425and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
7426
7427Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
7428the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
7429on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
7430
7431Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
7432bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
7433respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
7434You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
7435
7436To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
7437
7438@itemize @bullet
7439@item
ff5dcc92 7440The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
7441the @samp{--version} argument.
7442
7443Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 7444the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
7445
7446@item
ff5dcc92 7447Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
7448patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
7449
7450@item
7451The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
7452version number.
7453
7454@item
ff5dcc92 7455What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
7456``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
7457
7458@item
7459The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
7460observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
7461list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
7462sufficient.
7463
7464If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
7465and then we might not encounter the bug.
7466
7467@item
7468A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
7469bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
7470provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
7471bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
7472state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
7473requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
7474we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
7475attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
7476
7477If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
7478@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
7479object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
7480@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
7481how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
7482
7483@item
7484A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
7485incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
7486
ff5dcc92 7487Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
7488will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
7489not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
7490a chance to make a mistake.
7491
7492Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
7493say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 7494copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
7495C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
7496and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
7497fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
7498you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
7499any conclusion from our observations.
7500
7501@item
ff5dcc92 7502If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
7503diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
7504@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 7505If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
7506context, not by line number.
7507
7508The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
7509sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
7510@end itemize
7511
7512Here are some things that are not necessary:
7513
7514@itemize @bullet
7515@item
7516A description of the envelope of the bug.
7517
7518Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
7519which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
7520changes will not affect it.
7521
7522This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
7523will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
7524with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
7525We recommend that you save your time for something else.
7526
7527Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
7528of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
7529output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
7530less time, and so on.
7531
7532However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
7533report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
7534
7535@item
7536A patch for the bug.
7537
7538A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
7539the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
7540a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
7541to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
7542
ff5dcc92 7543Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
7544construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
7545through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
7546able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
7547fixed.
7548
7549And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
7550patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
7551help us to understand.
7552
7553@item
7554A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
7555
7556Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
7557things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
7558@end itemize
7559
7560@node MRI
7561@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
7562@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
7563To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
7564linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
7565alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
7566described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
7567simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 7568@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
7569linker commands; these commands are described here.
7570
7571In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
7572file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
7573features to make use of them.
7574
7575You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
7576@samp{-c} command-line option.
7577
7578Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
7579command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
7580blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 7581MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7582issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
7583
7584Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
7585
7586You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
7587lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
7588The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
7589
7590@table @code
7591@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
7592@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
7593@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7594Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
7595the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
7596@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
7597your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
7598script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
7599commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
7600input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
7601@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
7602
7603@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
7604@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
7605Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
7606in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
7607
7608@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
7609
7610@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
7611@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
7612Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
7613@var{expression} should be a power of two.
7614
7615@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
7616@item BASE @var{expression}
7617Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
7618absolute addresses) in the output file.
7619
7620@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
7621@item CHIP @var{expression}
7622@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
7623This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
7624
7625@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
7626@item END
7627This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
7628
7629@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
7630@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
7631Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 7632language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
7633
7634@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 7635@item
252b5132
RH
7636S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
7637
7638@item
7639IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
7640
7641@item
7642COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
7643@samp{COFF}
7644@end enumerate
7645
7646@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
7647@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
7648Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 7649@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
7650
7651The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
7652same line, with no change in its effect.
7653
7654@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
7655@item LOAD @var{filename}
7656@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
7657Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 7658same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
7659command line.
7660
7661@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
7662@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 7663@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
7664MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
7665option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
7666
7667@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
7668@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
7669@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 7670Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
7671order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
7672script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
7673sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
7674file, in the order specified.
7675
7676@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
7677@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
7678@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
7679@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
7680Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
7681@var{name} used in the linker input files.
7682
7683@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
7684@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
7685@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
7686@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
7687You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
7688specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
7689If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
7690@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
7691@end table
7692
793c5807
NC
7693@node GNU Free Documentation License
7694@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 7695@include fdl.texi
704c465c 7696
370b66a1
CD
7697@node LD Index
7698@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
7699
7700@printindex cp
7701
7702@tex
7703% I think something like @colophon should be in texinfo. In the
7704% meantime:
7705\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
7706\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
7707\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
7708\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
7709\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
7710\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
7711\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
7712\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
7713\page\colophon
7714% Blame: doc@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
7715@end tex
7716
252b5132 7717@bye
This page took 1.00358 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.